Quark XPress 5.0 User Guide QXP 5

User Manual: quark QuarkXPress - 5.0 - User Guide Free User Guide for QuarkXPress Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 674 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

A Guide to QuarkXPress:

Using QuarkXPress

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page i

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Quark, Inc., acknowledges with gratitude the efforts and contributions of all the

team members and departments involved in producing QuarkXPress™software

and QuarkXPress Passport™software and documentation, including: Product

Management, Program Management, Technical Writers, Quality Assurance,

Research and Development, Software Conﬁguration Management, Common

Components, Technical Support and Worldwide Product Services. Quark also

thanks its alpha and beta testing partners for their help in testing QuarkXPress

and QuarkXPress Passport.

This manual was produced entirely with QuarkXPress Passport and

Quark Publishing System™(QPS™).

LEGAL NOTICES

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent

a commitment on the part of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.

Use of the Quark Products is subject to the terms of the end user license agreement or

other applicable agreements for such product/service. In the event of a conﬂict between

such agreements and these provisions, the relevant agreements shall control.

Quark Products and materials are subject to the copy right and other intellectual property

protection of the United States and foreign countries. Unauthorized use or reproduction

without Quark’s written consent is prohibited.

Quark, QuarkXPress, QuarkXPress Passport, QuarkXTensions, and XTensions are trademarks

of Quark, Inc. and all applicable afﬁliated companies, Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. and in many

other countries. The Quark logo, QuarkCMS, and other Quark related marks which

Quark may adopt from time to time are trademarks of Quark, Inc. and all applicable

affiliated companies.

QPS and related marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Quark, Inc., used

under license by Modulo Systems Corporation. Modulo Systems Corporation is a

Quark-related company.

FOCOLTONE and FOCOLTONE Colour System are registered trademarks of

FOCOLTONE. The concept, structure, and form of FOCOLTONE material and intellec-

tual property are protected by patent and copyright law. Any reproduction in any form, in

whole or in part, for private use or for sale, is strictly forbidden. Contact FOCOLTONE, Ltd.

for speciﬁc patent information.

TRUMATCH, TRUMATCH Swatching System, and TRUMATCH System are trademarks

of TRUMATCH, Inc.

Color Data is produced under license from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.

The HASP® system and its documentation are copyrighted by Aladdin Knowledge

Legal Notices

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page ii

Toyo Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd. is the copyright owner of TOYO INK COLOR FINDER™SYSTEM

AND SOFTWARE which is licensed to Quark, Inc. to distribute for use in connection

with QuarkXPress. TOYO INK COLOR FINDER™SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE shall

not be copied onto another diskette or into memory unless as part of the execution of

QuarkXPress. TOYO INK COLOR FINDER™SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE © Toyo Ink

Mfg. Co., Ltd., 1991. COLOR FINDER is registered or is in the process of registration as

the registered trademark of Toyo Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd. COLOR FINDER™computer video

simulation used in the product may not match the COLOR FINDER™book, and addition-

ally some printer color used in the product may also not match. Please use the COLOR

FINDER™book to obtain the accurate color.

Quark, Inc. does not warrant, guarantee, or make any representations regarding the use or

the results of the use of any color system included in Quark products. Video simulations

may not match published color standards. Refer to current materials of the speciﬁc color

company (i.e., PANTONE, Inc.; FOCOLTONE, Ltd.; TRUMATCH, Inc.; TOYO INK,

Mfg. Co., Ltd.; or other companies involved in the process of color reproduction) for

accurate color samples.

Kodak is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

Microsoft is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries and the Microsoft Reader logo is used under license

from Microsoft.

Adobe, Acrobat Reader, and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems

Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Pantone® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may

not match PANTONE-identiﬁed standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications

for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc., trademarks are the property of

Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc. 2002.

Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to

Quark, Inc. to distribute for use in combination with QuarkXPress. PANTONE Color Data

and/or software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of

the execution of QuarkXPress.

QuickHelp™is licensed from Altura Software, Inc. End User is prohibited from taking

any action to derive source code equivalent of QuickHelp, including reverse assembly

or reverse compilation.

All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

THIRD PARTY XTENSIONS SOFTWARE DISCLAIMER

QUARK IS NOT THE MANUFACTURER OF THIRD PARTY XTENSIONS SOFTWARE

OR OTHER THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE (HEREINAFTER “THIRD

PARTY PRODUCTS”) AND SUCH THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS HAVE NOT BEEN CRE-

ATED, REVIEWED, OR TESTED BY QUARK, THE QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES

OR THEIR LICENSORS. (QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES SHALL MEAN ANY

PERSON, BRANCH, OR ENTITY CONTROLLING, CONTROLLED BY OR UNDER

COMMON CONTROL WITH QUARK OR ITS PARENT OR A MAJORITY OF THE

QUARK SHAREHOLDERS, WHETHER NOW EXISTING OR FORMED IN THE

FUTURE, TOGETHER WITH ANY PERSON, BRANCH, OR ENTITY WHICH MAY

ACQUIRE SUCH STATUS IN THE FUTURE.)

iii

Legal Notices

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page iii

QUARK, THE QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND/OR THEIR LICENSORS MAKE

NO WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE QUARK

PRODUCTS/SERVICES AND/OR THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS/SERVICES, THEIR MER-

CHANTABILITY, OR THEIR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. QUARK, THE

QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND THEIR LICENSORS DISCLAIM ALL WAR-

RANTIES RELATING TO THE QUARK PRODUCTS/SERVICES AND ANY THIRD

PARTY PRODUCTS/SERVICES. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR COLLATERAL, AND WHETHER OR NOT, MADE

BY DISTRIBUTORS, RETAILERS, XTENSIONS DEVELOPERS OR OTHER THIRD

PARTIES ARE DISCLAIMED BY QUARK, THE QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES

AND THEIR LICENSORS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY

OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, COMPATIBILITY, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS ERROR-

FREE OR THAT ERRORS CAN OR WILL BE CORRECTED. THIRD PARTIES MAY PRO-

VIDE LIMITED WARRANTIES AS TO THEIR OWN PRODUCTS AND/OR SERVICES,

AND USERS MUST LOOK TO SAID THIRD PARTIES FOR SUCH WARRANTIES, IF

ANY. SOME JURISDICTIONS, STATES OR PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITA-

TIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY

TO PARTICULAR USERS.

IN NO EVENT SHALL QUARK, THE QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES, AND/OR

THEIR LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CON-

SEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST TIME, LOST SAVINGS, LOST DATA, LOST FEES, OR

EXPENSES OF ANY KIND ARISING FROM INSTALLATION OR USE OF THE QUARK

PRODUCTS/SERVICES, IN ANY MATTER, HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY. IF, NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, QUARK, THE

QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND/OR THEIR LICENSORS ARE FOUND TO

HAVE LIABILITY RELATING TO THE QUARK PRODUCTS/SERVICES OR THIRD

PARTY PRODUCTS/SERVICES, SUCH LIABILITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE

AMOUNT PAID BY THE USER TO QUARK FOR THE SOFTWARE/SERVICES AT

ISSUE (EXCLUDING THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS/SERVICES), IF ANY, OR THE LOWEST

AMOUNT UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, WHICHEVER IS LESS. THESE LIMITATIONS

WILL APPLY EVEN IF QUARK, THE QUARK AFFILIATED COMPANIES, THEIR

LICENSORS AND/OR THEIR AGENTS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF SUCH POSSIBLE

DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS, STATES OR PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW

THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-

AGES, SO THIS LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY. ALL OTHER

LIMITATIONS PROVIDED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, INCLUDING STATUTES OF

LIMITATION, SHALL CONTINUE TO APPLY.

IN THE EVENT ANY OF THESE PROVISIONS ARE OR BECOME UNENFORCEABLE

UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, SUCH PROVISION SHALL BE MODIFIED OR LIMITED

IN ITS EFFECT TO THE EXTENT NECESSARY TO CAUSE IT TO BE ENFORCEABLE.

Legal Notices

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page iv

Introduction

About this Book xiii

Other Helpful Publications xvi

QuarkXPress Basics xvii

The Interface xxii

1 Customizing QuarkXPress

Setting Default Values 1

Setting Preferences 3

Creating Kerning and Tracking Tables and

Hyphenation Exceptions 5

Saving QuarkXPress Preferences 6

Understanding Nonmatching Preferences 8

Using XTensions Software 12

Managing Print Styles and PPDs P14

Using Apple Events Scripts — Mac OS Only 16

2 Layout Tools

Arranging Documents 18

Navigating Through Documents 20

Changing Document Views 23

Using the Pasteboard P24

Using Rulers and Guides 25

Specifying Greeking 29

3 Document Basics

Creating New Print Documents P30

Creating New Web Documents W32

Opening Documents 34

Saving Documents 35

Saving Documents Automatically 37

Saving Revisions of Documents 39

Saving Documents as Templates 41

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page v

4 Box Basics

Creating Boxes 43

Resizing Boxes 47

Reshaping Boxes 48

Moving Boxes 56

Framing Boxes 58

Coloring Boxes 69

Merging and Splitting Boxes 72

Filling and Converting Boxes 77

Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness 79

5 Line Basics

Creating Lines 85

Resizing Lines 88

Reshaping Lines 91

Moving Lines 98

Applying Line Styles 101

6 Manipulating Items

Selecting Items 106

Moving, Reshaping, and Resizing Items 107

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Items 108

Clearing and Deleting Items 110

Undoing and Redoing Actions 110

Locking and Unlocking Items 111

Controlling the Stacking Order of Items 112

Grouping Items 114

Duplicating and Repeating Items 116

Spacing and Aligning Items 118

Rotating and Skewing Items 120

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page vi

7 Document Layout

The Elements of a Web Document W122

Working with Master Pages 127

Formatting and Applying Master Pages 135

Changing Page Size and Facing-Pages Status P139

Setting Page Properties W140

Creating Multipage Spreads P142

Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents 145

Inserting, Deleting, and Moving Pages 146

Working with Text Chains 151

Creating “Continued” References P155

Working with Columns 156

Copying Items and Pages Between Documents 158

8 Text Basics

Editing Text 162

Importing and Exporting Text 165

Finding and Changing Text 169

Finding and Changing Attributes 172

Changing Fonts in a Document 176

Checking Spelling 178

Using Auxiliary Dictionaries 182

9 Typography

Conﬁrming Typographic Preferences P184

Applying Character Attributes P186

Specifying Kerning and Tracking 194

Applying Paragraph Attributes P198

Specifying Alignment and Indentations P199

Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing 202

Setting Tabs P205

Controlling Widow and Orphan Lines P208

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation P210

vii

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page vii

Working with Style Sheets P218

Positioning Text in Text Boxes P228

Principles of Web Typography W233

HTML Text Boxes and Raster Text Boxes W235

10 Graphics in Typography

Converting Text to Boxes 237

Running Text Around Items 240

Creating Text Paths 255

Creating Initial Caps 260

Creating Rules Above and Below Paragraphs 262

Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text 265

11 Pictures

Understanding Picture File Formats 268

Importing Pictures 272

Saving A Page as an EPS File 276

Manipulating Pictures 279

Applying Contrast to Pictures 285

Applying Custom Halftone Screens

to Pictures P288

Creating and Editing Clipping Paths 290

Listing and Updating Pictures 299

Conﬁguring Picture Export Options W302

12 Color

Understanding Spot and Process Colors P305

Specifying Matching System Colors 306

Understanding Web-Safe Colors W308

Creating and Editing Colors 309

Applying Color, Shade, and Blends 324

Using Color Management P334

viii

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page viii

13 Trapping

Understanding Trapping P347

Trapping Guidelines P349

Specifying Default Trapping P349

Specifying Color-Speciﬁc Trapping P353

Specifying Item-Speciﬁc Trapping P357

Trapping EPS Pictures to Background Colors P361

Creating and Using a Rich Black P363

14 Tables

Creating Tables 366

Working with Cell Content 370

Formatting Tables 373

Manipulating Tables 376

Converting Tables to Text 378

Tables In Web Documents W379

15 Layers

Creating Layers 381

Working with Layers 385

Displaying and Selecting Layers 390

Arranging Layers 395

Placing and Moving Items on Layers 397

Locking Items on Layers 399

16 Libraries

Creating New Libraries 401

Opening Libraries 402

Working with Libraries 403

Working with Labels 407

Saving Libraries 409

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page ix

17 Lists

Preparing Style Sheets for Lists 410

Creating and Editing Lists 411

Importing Lists from Another Document 414

Displaying Lists 417

Updating Lists 421

Working with Lists in Books 422

18 Indexes

Loading the Index QuarkXTensions Software P425

Specifying the Index Marker Color P426

Creating Index Entries P427

Creating Cross-References P430

Editing and Deleting Index Entries P433

Building Indexes P434

Editing Final Indexes P437

Nested Index Quick Reference P438

Run-in Index Quick Reference P439

19 Books

Creating New Books 440

Opening and Saving Books P441

Working with Chapters P443

Controlling Page Numbers P446

Synchronizing Chapters P448

Printing Chapters P451

Creating Indexes and Tables of Contents P453

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page x

20 Hyperlinks

Understanding Hyperlinks 454

Working with Destinations and Anchors 457

Creating, Editing, and Deleting Hyperlinks 463

Setting Preferences for Hyperlinks and Anchors 466

Showing and Hiding Hyperlinks and Anchors 468

Navigating with the Hyperlinks Palette 470

21 Interactive Web Elements

Working with Rollovers W471

Working with Image Maps W473

Working with Meta Tags W477

22 Forms

Understanding HTML Forms W488

Creating an HTML Form W489

Adding Controls to a Form W492

Creating a Menu W503

23 Output

Printing a Web document W505

Understanding DPI and LPI P506

Specifying Print Options:

The Print Dialog Box P509

Specifying Print Options:

The Print Dialog Box Tabs P511

Creating and Using Print Styles P526

Specifying the Setup for Imagesetters P528

What is a RIP? P529

Updating Picture Paths P530

Printing Odd-Sized Documents P530

Creating a PostScript File P533

Preparing Documents for Service Bureaus P534

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xi

24 Previewing and Exporting Web Pages

Previewing a Web Page W538

Exporting a Web Page W540

25 QuarkXPress Passport

QuarkXPress Passport Terms 542

Managing Language Files 543

Specifying the Program Language 544

Assigning Languages to Paragraphs 545

Checking Spelling in Multilingual Documents 546

Hyphenation Methods 547

Saving Documents with Multiple Languages 549

Appendices

Alerts — Mac OS 552

Alerts — Windows 571

XPress Tags 589

Cross-Platform Issues 602

Print/Web Conversion Issues 604

Glossary

Index

xii

Table of Contents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xii

Introduction

From a simple brochure to highly complex corporate communications, QuarkXPress

encourages you to challenge the boundaries of professional publishing, both in print

and on the Web. With superior color capabilities, exceptional picture handling, and

precise typographic controls, QuarkXPress increases your publishing power.

ABOUT THIS BOOK

“A Guide to QuarkXPress: Using QuarkXPress” is not meant to be read cover to

cover. The book is designed so that you can look things up quickly, ﬁnd out what you

need to know, and get on with your work. However, if you need more comprehensive

information about electronic publishing, that is also provided.

WHERE WE’RE COMING FROM

This book assumes you are familiar with your computer and know how to:

•Launch an application

•Open, save, and close ﬁles

•Use menus, dialog boxes, and palettes

•Use the mouse, keyboard commands, and modiﬁer keys

If you need help performing any of these tasks, consult the documentation

resources (user or reference guides) provided with your computer.

HOW TO USE THIS BOOK

This book offers steps for specific tasks. It includes concept blocks, which

provide helpful background information about various features so you can

familiarize yourself with related concepts before beginning a task.

Whenever you think to yourself, “I wonder how to do this…,” check this book,

Using QuarkXPress. The detailed table of contents at the beginning of this book

and the index should help you quickly ﬁnd the information you need.

Each chapter in this book includes a series of speciﬁc tasks, such as “Creating

New Documents” or “Importing Pictures.” Instructions for accomplishing tasks

are presented in steps or as bulleted lists. Tips with useful information about

QuarkXPress are frequently included on these pages.

xiii

About this Book

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xiii

CONCEPT BLOCKS

Background information about publishing tasks and concepts are also provided

throughout this book. The ﬁrst word in the title of a concept block is usually

“Understanding,” for example: “Understanding Picture File Formats.” You can

read concept blocks any time — they’re designed to round out your knowledge

of electronic publishing without relating to a speciﬁc task.

WHAT YOU’RE LOOKING AT

This book uses various conventions (styles) to help you find

information quickly:

BOLD TYPE STYLE

The names of QuarkXPress menu commands, dialog boxes, and other controls

are set in bold type. For example: “The Colors palette lets you apply colors or

inks to text, pictures, lines, and box backgrounds.”

REFERENCES AND ARROWS

Whenever a feature is mentioned, a reference shows you how to access that

feature. For example: “The Save as dialog box (File menu) lets you save a copy

of a document.” Arrows are used to represent the menu path to a feature.

For example: “Choose File &Print to display the Print dialog box.”

Choosing File &Print.

ICONS

The names of tools and graphic buttons are followed by the appropriate icons.

For example: “Select the Item tool e in the Tools palette” or “Click the Center

button }in the Measurements palette.”

xiv

About this Book

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xiv

CHARTS

This book charts the range of values that any control can accept. Charts follow

this format:

RANGE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM SMALLEST INCREMENT

2 to 720 pt various (", pt, cm, etc.) .001

The “Range” is expressed in the default measurement system. You can enter

values in ﬁelds using the measurement system described in the “Measurement

system” column. For example, measurements may be expressed in pixels,

points, or any measurement system supported by QuarkXPress. (The example

above shows a feature that accepts any supported measurement system.) The

“Smallest increment” is the smallest unit of measurement you can enter.

MAC OS AND WINDOWS REFERENCES

QuarkXPress is designed to incorporate the same features on Mac OS and

Windows. This guide is designed to be used with QuarkXPress on either

platform. While most of the information in this guide applies to both platforms,

operating system differences occasionally require the application to function in

a slightly different manner on Mac OS and Windows. In such a situation, this

guide identiﬁes which functions are unique to Mac OS and which functions are

unique to Windows.

PRINT AND WEB MODES

QuarkXPress lets you create documents both for printed output and for the

Web. When you’re working on a print document, QuarkXPress is in print mode;

when you’re working on a Web document, QuarkXPress is in Web mode. The

mode determines which tools, features, and other user interface elements

are available. In this guide, features that are unique to print documents are

identified with a Picon, and features that are unique to Web documents

are identified with a Wicon.

NOTES AND TIPS

∫Notes provide helpful information about particular features.

åTips provide extra information about particular features and general techniques

for electronic publishing.

About this Book

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xv

OTHER HELPFUL PUBLICATIONS

The QuarkXPress product includes various electronic documents to assist you in using

QuarkXPress 5.0. You can ﬁnd these documents on the QuarkXPress CD-ROM. Quark

also provides QuarkXPress training on the World Wide Web to help you familiarize

yourself with the various features of QuarkXPress.

A GUIDE TO QUARKXPRESS: INTERFACE OVERVIEW

If you stumble on an unfamiliar command, or want more information about

how to use a tool, check the book A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview. The

ﬁle name is “Interface Overview.pdf” on your QuarkXPress CD-ROM. A Guide to

QuarkXPress: Interface Overview explains the QuarkXPress interface, including

menus and dialog boxes, tools, palettes, and preferences. Commands are docu-

mented in menu order, starting with the ﬁrst command in the File menu.

WHAT’S NEW IN QUARKXPRESS 5.0

If you are a proficient QuarkXPress user, start with the file “What’s New

in 5_0.pdf,” found on the QuarkXPress CD-ROM. It provides a brief overview

of the new features in this version of QuarkXPress to get you started with your

new software as quickly as possible.

OTHER PIECES IN THE BOX

Your QuarkXPress product also includes installation and user registration

instructions, service plan information, a list of keyboard commands, and

documentation for any late-breaking features.

QUARKXPRESS TRAINING ON THE WEB

QuarkXPress online training is a Web-based tutorial that will take you

through the process of applying specific QuarkXPress features to sample

QuarkXPress documents.

If you have little or no experience with QuarkXPress and you want to begin

learning about it, these online training exercises will teach you the basic skills

necessary to create print and Web documents using this application. Experienced

users may also ﬁnd the lessons useful for learning features that are new to

QuarkXPress 5.0, such as layers, tables, and the Web document features.

You can find the QuarkXPress online training on the Quark™Web site at

www.quark.com. All you need to view the online training is an Internet

connection with Web browser version 4.0 or later (for example, Microsoft™

Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator). To perform the training exercises,

you need QuarkXPress or a demo version of QuarkXPress.

Introduction

xvi

Other Helpful Publications

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xvi

QUARKXPRESS BASICS

To use QuarkXPress effectively, you need to understand a few basic concepts. Read this

section if you are new to QuarkXPress or if you need a quick refresher. If you are new to

QuarkXPress, we recommend that you complete the online training exercises available

on the Quark Web site, www.quark.com, to familiarize yourself with the individual

QuarkXPress features.

PRINT AND WEB MODES

QuarkXPress lets you create documents both for print and the Web. When

you’re working on a print document, QuarkXPress is in print mode; when

you’re working on a Web document, QuarkXPress is in Web mode. The mode

determines which tools, features, and other user interface elements are available.

In this manual, features that are unique to print documents are identified

with a Picon, and features that are unique to Web documents are identiﬁed

with a Wicon.

∫Some print features can be used in Web documents. To use print features

in Web documents, see “The Elements of a Web Document” in Chapter 7,

Document Layout.”

PRINT DOCUMENT ENVIRONMENT P

A work area called the pasteboard surrounds each page or spread. You use

the pasteboard to store items temporarily or to experiment with something

before you put it on a page. You can have individual pages or multipage

spreads, and you can add, move, and delete pages as you work. Pages can be

manipulated using the Document Layout palette or the Page menu, and in

Thumbnails view.

WEB DOCUMENT ENVIRONMENT W

A page in a Web document has no ﬁxed size; it expands as necessary to make

room for the items it contains. However, you can use the page width guide as

a guideline to make sure the pages you design will ﬁt on your users’ monitors.

Gray regions at the bottom and right of the page indicate the page’s true

boundaries, but keep in mind that different Web browsers often display

the same page differently.

There are no pasteboards in a Web document. Pages can be manipulated using

the Document Layout palette or the Page menu.

Introduction

xvii

QuarkXPress Basics

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xvii

BASIC TOOLS

QuarkXPress pages contain items. Items are text boxes, text paths, picture boxes,

tables, and lines; they are created in QuarkXPress and manipulated primarily

with the Item tool e. Contents are text and pictures; they are manipulated

primarily with the Content tool E.

In general, you will use Item menu commands and the left half of the Measure-

ments palette when working with items. Likewise, you will use the Style menu

and the right half of the Measurements palette when working with contents.

The controls in the Measurements palette change according to the current selection —

whether it is a text box, picture box, text path, line, text, or picture.

THE BOX CONCEPT

In QuarkXPress, most things go into a box. Text is contained in text boxes and

pictures are contained in picture boxes. Text can also be placed on a path. You

have control over the size, shape, layering, color, and other properties of each

box or path — and you have similar control over the text or pictures contained

in them.

TABLES

A table is a series of rectangular, grouped boxes — called “cells” — that you

can use to present data in a concise format. QuarkXPress lets you create

tables, convert text to tables, easily edit table data, and add or remove rows

and columns as necessary. The cells can contain text, pictures, or have a

content of None.

LAYERS

By letting you control which items display on a page, layers make it easier for

you to edit and manipulate documents. The Layers palette lets you place all

items on the same layer or create different layers for different items. You can

display some layers while hiding others, so you can opt to see only those items

that you want to edit at a given time.

WORKING WITH TEXT P

A text box or a text path contains text. To create a text box or path, use any of

the text box creation tools T, Å, ı, Ç, Î,´, or Ô, or a text path creation

tool , Ò, Â, or ˜. Then use the Get Text command (File menu) to import

text ﬁles from other sources, including many popular word processors, data-

bases, and spreadsheets. To enter your own text into a text box, select a text

box with the Content tool Eand begin typing.

When you are working with text, the Style menu provides formatting

options such as fonts, type styles, and colors. High-end typographic controls

Introduction

xviii

QuarkXPress Basics

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xviii

are provided through a combination of menu items, keyboard commands,

and preferences. To simplify text formatting, you can create paragraph and

character style sheets (Edit &Style Sheets) and apply them using a menu

command, the Style Sheets palette, or keyboard commands.

To ﬂow text from one text box to the next (or from one text path to the next),

you can create an automatic chain of text. You can also use the Linking u and

Unlinking U tools to manually create custom text chains. To create an auto-

matic text chain, check Automatic Text Box in the New Document dialog box

(File &New &Document).

WORKING WITH TEXT IN WEB DOCUMENTS W

The typographic effects available in HTML are more limited than those available

within QuarkXPress. You can create text boxes that contain formatted HTML

text, or you can use the full range of typographic effects by converting text

boxes and text paths to graphics at export. If you export a large amount of your

text as graphics, be aware that this will increase the size of your page and the

page’s downloading time.

PLACING PICTURES

“Picture” is a general term for any type of graphic ﬁle in a QuarkXPress docu-

ment. Just as text boxes contain text, picture boxes contain pictures. To create

a picture box, use any of the picture box creation tools p, x, O, å, 7, ƒ,

or ∂. Then, use the Get Picture command (File menu) to import a copy of a

picture ﬁle. You can also paste a picture that has been copied to the Clipboard

into your document.

When you are working with pictures, the Style menu provides formatting

choices such as contrast, line screen, and colors. Picture formatting options are

selectively available depending on the imported picture’s graphic ﬁle format.

EXPORTING PICTURES W

When you export a Web document as an HTML file, all pictures in that

document are converted to either JPEG, GIF, or PNG format, regardless of their

previous format. You can control the format in which each picture is exported.

Text boxes and paths can also be exported as pictures. You can control the

export format of these items, as well.

SHAPES AND LINES

To create a colored shape, create a picture box with any kind of shape and apply

a color to the background of the box. Background colors are applied to boxes

using the Colors palette (View menu) or the Box tab of the Modify dialog box

(Item menu). The Merge and Shape controls (Item menu) let you create boxes

with multiple contours and combine different boxes.

Introduction

xix

QuarkXPress Basics

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xix

Create custom line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu);

then use line creation tools o, œ, ∞, or §to draw the lines. When a line is

selected, the Modify dialog box and the Style menu provide options (such as

style, width, and arrowheads) for formatting lines.

ELECTRONIC PASTE-UP

Items can be moved, resized, reshaped, and layered with other items. You can

drag items into place by aligning them with rulers and guides, or you can enter

precise Xand Ycoordinates in the Measurements palette.

Each type of item has its own Modify dialog box (Item menu) that controls

the size, position, background color, position of the contents, and more. To

ﬂow text around pictures, lines, and other items, use the Runaround tab in

the Modify dialog box. Other Item menu commands let you group items so

they can be moved together, change the stacking order of items, duplicate

items, and space selected items evenly.

When you choose Item &Modify, a dialog box specific to the selected item displays.

The various tabs in the Modify dialog box provide access to different sets of controls.

FORMS AND IMAGE MAPS W

Web documents can contain forms, which allow readers to send information to

the Web server. Forms let readers enter information about themselves or order

goods and services over the Internet.

Web documents can also contain image maps. An image map is an HTML

feature that lets you link to different pages by clicking on different parts of

a picture in a Web page.

Introduction

QuarkXPress Basics

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xx

MASTER PAGES AND TEMPLATES

Items (pictures and text) that recur throughout your document can be placed

on master pages. Applying a master page to a document page automatically

places the recurring items. For example, if you are working on a newsletter,

you might want a master page for the cover and masthead, one for the inside

spreads, and one with mailing information for the back page. Master pages

can be created, edited, and applied using the Document Layout palette.

Once you’ve established the formatting of a publication, you can save a

document as a reusable template.

CUSTOMIZING QUARKXPRESS

QuarkXPress has many options for customizing how you work, how your text

flows, how your tools work, and more. These are called “preferences,” which

you can customize for your copy of QuarkXPress (application preferences) and

for individual documents (document preferences).

In addition to preferences, you can create custom style sheets, colors, dashes

and stripes, lists (based on style sheets), and hyphenation and justification

speciﬁcations for use in a document or template. All these speciﬁcations are

created through commands in the Edit menu.

PRINTING P

The Print dialog box (File menu) offers several output options. For convenience,

you can combine all these settings and save them as Print Styles (Edit menu).

When you print, QuarkXPress requires all the font and picture ﬁles used in the

document. The Collect for Output (File menu) feature automatically gathers

the document, pictures, and fonts into one folder, and it produces a report of

the document’s fonts, colors, trapping, and other settings — ready for output.

EXPORTING AS HTML W

When you export a Web document in HTML format, QuarkXPress exports

any necessary accompanying files (such as picture files), too. You can also

export HTML templates, which let you insert XML content into a page and

automatically format that content as HTML.

POWER THROUGH PALETTES AND KEYBOARD COMMANDS

As you use QuarkXPress, you will develop your own working style. Perhaps you

will prefer to use the mouse and menu commands for everything; you may ﬁnd

that you prefer the quick access to features provided by palettes and extensive

keyboard commands. In many cases, QuarkXPress offers multiple ways to

perform a given task.

Introduction

xxi

QuarkXPress Basics

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxi

THE INTERFACE

QuarkXPress menus and dialog boxes adhere to Mac OS and Windows conventions —

with a few enhancements. This section provides a quick look at standard interface

controls, and highlights features unique to QuarkXPress. If you are new to Mac OS or

Windows, we recommend that you consult the documentation resources provided with

your computer for complete information about using the operating system. If you are

new to QuarkXPress, we recommend that you complete the online training exercises,

available on the Quark Web site at www.quark.com, to familiarize yourself with the

individual QuarkXPress features.

QUARKXPRESS MENUS

The menu bar displays the menus available in QuarkXPress: File, Edit, Style,

Item, Page, View, Utilities, Window (Windows only) and Help. The menu bar

can also display menus for QuarkXTensions™software and third-party XTensions™

software. Each menu contains groups of related commands separated by lines.

Many menu entries are followed by keyboard shortcuts, displayed using the

Command (C), Option (`), Control (^), and Shift (w) keys on Mac OS, or

the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys on Windows.

Like other QuarkXPress menus, the File menu contains groups of related commands

separated by lines.

QuarkXPress menus are context-sensitive, which means that menu items change

according to the active item, the current situation, or the selected tool:

•The commands listed under a menu may change. For example, the Style menu

commands change depending on whether text, a picture, or a line is active.

Introduction

xxii

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxii

•An individual menu command may change. For example, the Undo command

(Edit menu) changes to reflect your last action (such as Undo Typing or

Undo Item Deletion).

•The availability of menu entries may change. For example, when a picture is

selected, the Save Text command (File menu) is not available.

•The availability of entire menus may change. For example, the Style menu

items for text are available only when a text box is active and the Content

tool Eis selected.

•The function of a menu command may change slightly when you press a

modifier key while displaying the menu. For example, on Mac OS, pressing

Option while you choose the Item menu changes the Send to Back command

to Send Backward.

CONTEXT MENUS

To save production time while working with documents, QuarkXPress also

includes special menus called context menus. Context menus are keyboard-

activated and context-sensitive, so they respond dynamically to the task

at hand.

•To display a context menu on Mac OS, press the appropriate keyboard

command and click the object you want to affect. The default keyboard

command is Control+click. You can switch this keyboard command with

the Zoom keyboard command (Control+Shift+click) using the buttons in

the Control Key area in the Preferences dialog box Interactive pane

(Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

•To display a context menu on Windows, right-click the object you want

to affect.

When you display a context menu by clicking empty space on a document page, options

that are relevant to the entire document display in the menu.

åContext menus are available for rulers, empty space on a document page,

picture boxes, text boxes and text paths, lines, tables, and many palettes.

In print documents, a context menu is available for the pasteboard.

Introduction

xxiii

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxiii

CHECKMARK

A checkmark jin a menu indicates one of the following:

•A function has been performed. For example, a checkmark displays next to

Flip Vertical (Style menu) when the contents of a box are ﬂipped vertically.

•A feature is turned on. For example, a checkmark next to Snap to Guides

(View menu) means that items in your document will snap to the guides

you’ve created.

•A format from a list has been applied. For example, a checkmark displays in the

Font submenu next to the font applied to selected text. When multiple formats

have been applied to a selection, checkmarks only display next to formats

common to the entire selection.

The checkmark next to Flip Vertical in the Style menu for text indicates that the contents of

the active text box are ﬂipped vertically.

QUARKXPRESS DIALOG BOXES

Choosing a menu item followed by ellipsis points (…) displays a dialog box.

Dialog boxes contain related commands that allow you to specify exactly what

you want to happen. The context-sensitive controls in QuarkXPress dialog

boxes consist primarily of tabs, areas, fields, pop-up menus, radio buttons,

check boxes, and buttons.

Introduction

xxiv

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxiv

The Modify dialog box (Item menu) includes tabs, areas, ﬁelds, pop-up menus, check boxes,

and buttons.

TABS

Many dialog boxes provide multiple functions through tabs. By clicking a

tab icon, you can display different sets of controls. Pressing C+Option+Tab

on Mac OS or Ctrl+Tab on Windows takes you to the next tab in a dialog box.

AREA

Related commands within a dialog box or tab are grouped into an “area,”

which is named and surrounded by a border. For example, the Box tab in the

Modify dialog box (Item menu) has a Blend area, which lets you specify a

custom blend for a box.

The Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) includes a bordered Blend area.

Introduction

xxv

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxv

LIST

Some dialog boxes include scrollable lists of elements that you can select or edit.

For example, the Colors dialog box (Edit menu) displays a list of colors. You can

navigate through lists using the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the

type of list, you may be able to multiple-select items to edit. For example, in the

Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences),

you can select multiple tools and edit common attributes. To select a group

of consecutive elements, click the ﬁrst element then press Shift while clicking

the last element in the range. To select multiple, nonconsecutive elements,

press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while clicking each one.

FIELD

A ﬁeld is a rectangular box for entering a speciﬁc value. For example, in the

Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu), you can enter the number

of columns for an active text box in the Columns field. Fields have the

following characteristics:

•You can enter measurements in any of the supported measurement systems,

using the following abbreviations: inches or inches decimal ("), picas (p),

points (pt), millimeters (mm), centimeters (cm), ciceros (c), and agates (ag).

•When you are not using the default measurement system, you only need to

specify units of measure with an abbreviation. For example, if your measure-

ment preferences are set to inches, and you want to specify an indentation in

points, you can enter “6 pt” in the ﬁeld. The measurement will be converted

to inches the next time you open the dialog box.

•The default measurement system is speciﬁed in the Horizontal and Vertical

pop-up menus in the Measurements pane of the Preferences dialog box

(Edit & Preferences & Preferences & Document).

•You can press Tab to select the next ﬁeld in a dialog box and Shift+Tab to select

the previous ﬁeld.

•You can perform mathematical operations in fields using these operators:

+ (addition), –(subtraction), * (multiplication), or, / (division). For example, to

double the width of a box, you can multiply the width by 2 by entering *2 to

the right of the current value. You can even perform multiple operations —

such as dividing a value by 4, then adding 2.

You can perform mathematical operations in QuarkXPress ﬁelds. The formula in the Width ﬁeld

multiplies the width of the box by 2, then adds 1 point. The formula in the Height ﬁeld divides

the height of the box by 2, then subtracts .25 inch.

Introduction

xxvi

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxvi

∫QuarkXPress performs multiplication and division ﬁrst, followed by subtraction

and addition, from left to right; you cannot use parentheses when performing

mathematical operations in ﬁelds. You can add and subtract speciﬁc measure-

ments, such as 2".

POP-UP MENU

A pop-up menu is a small menu within a dialog box or palette.

A pop-up menu contains a list of options and may also have an editable ﬁeld

in which you can enter a custom value (such as a percentage) or a word (such

as a font name) rather than choosing an option from the list.

A pop-up menu offers a list of options, and often includes a field where you can enter

custom values. For example, the Width pop-up menu in the Frame tab of the Modify

dialog box (Item menu) includes a list of frame widths and a field.

CHECK BOX

A check box lets you turn options on `and off ,. Checking a box may

activate other controls; checking or unchecking a box may expand a dialog

box to display more controls.

RADIO BUTTON

A radio button lets you select from among mutually exclusive options.

For example, in the XTensions pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences), you can choose when to display the XTensions

Manager dialog box by clicking a radio button.

BUTTON

A button (shaped like this on Mac OS or on Windows), performs

an action. If a button has a heavier border around it, such as on Mac OS

or on Windows, you can also press Return or Enter (Mac OS) or Enter

(Windows) to activate it. On Windows, if a button has a dotted outline around

the text , you can also press the space bar to activate the button. A button

Introduction

xxvii

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxvii

may also include a pop-up menu that lets you choose a type of action.

For example, the New button in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit menu) lets

you create either a character style sheet or a paragraph style sheet.

Many dialog boxes in QuarkXPress include an Apply button so you can preview

your changes before closing the dialog box. For example, the Apply button

in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style &Formats) lets you see how

your changes affect selected paragraphs.

NAVIGATIONAL DIALOG BOXES

The Open and Save as dialog boxes are used to open, import, export, or save

ﬁles; they include standard Mac OS or Windows controls for navigating through

disks and folders so you can locate ﬁles, or choose where you want to save ﬁles.

Dialog boxes in QuarkXPress with Open or Save as navigational dialog box

elements include: New Web Document, New Library, New Book, Open,

Save as, Get Text, Save Text, Append, Save Page as EPS, Export HTML,

Collect for Output, and Auxiliary Dictionary.

The Save as dialog box (File menu) is an example of a navigational dialog box. It includes

the current disk name, the Eject, Desktop, New Folder, Cancel, and Save buttons, pop-up

menus for ﬁle type and version, a scroll list for navigating through folders, and the Include

Preview check box (Mac OS only).

ALERT DIALOG BOXES

An alert is a dialog box that warns you when there is a problem and often

suggests a solution. For example, if you enter an invalid value in a ﬁeld, an

alert notifies you and often provides an acceptable range of values for the

field. For a list of alerts you may encounter in QuarkXPress, see the “Alerts”

sections of Chapter 26, “Appendices.”

Introduction

xxviii

The Interface

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page xxviii

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Your publication uses picas, while another uses inches. You only work with text and

you need typographer’s quotation marks, but your colleague only works with output

and needs speciﬁc trapping settings. Fortunately, QuarkXPress can accommodate all

these needs.

Since everyone’s work environment has different demands, and every individual has

personal preferences, QuarkXPress provides a variety of options for customizing the

way it works. You can set application default settings and preferences, modify the

“XPress Preferences” file, add features with XTensions software, and automate

manual processes on Mac OS with Apple events scripts. If you invest the time to set

up QuarkXPress to suit your needs, you will be more comfortable working with the

application and save hours of time producing your documents.

SETTING DEFAULT VALUES

QuarkXPress uses a variety of default settings as the basis for all new documents.

These default settings include style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justification

speciﬁcations, lists, dashes and stripes, and the default auxiliary dictionary. You can

modify the default settings by changing them when no documents are open. If you

change any of these default settings when a document is open, the change is saved

only with the document. To modify the default application settings:

1Make sure no documents are open, then choose an option from the Edit

menu to modify the default settings: Style Sheets, Colors, H&Js, Lists,

Dashes & Stripes, Print Styles P, Meta Tags W, or Menus W.For speciﬁc

information about the controls in any of the dialog boxes mentioned, see

Chapter 4, “Edit Menu” and Chapter 9, “Utilities Menu,” in A Guide to

QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.

•Style Sheets: Edit the πNormal paragraph style sheet and the ØNormal

character style sheet (the default style sheets for all new text boxes). Create

new style sheets to include with all new documents.

•Colors: Create colors to include with all new documents and delete colors that

will not be used (for example, you may want to delete Red, Green, and Blue).

You cannot edit or delete Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, or white. You can edit,

but not delete, Registration. You can edit the default trapping for colors as well.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Setting Default Values

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 1

•H&Js: Edit the Standard hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation to specify

default automatic hyphenation rules and word and character spacing values.

The Normal style sheet uses the Standard hyphenation and justification

speciﬁcation by default. Create new hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations

to include with all new documents.

•Lists: Lists are generated from text that uses the character or paragraph style

sheets you specify. Create new lists to include with all new documents.

•Dashes & Stripes: Edit the default line and frame patterns and create new

patterns to include with all new documents. You cannot edit or delete the

Solid line.

•Print Styles: Print styles allow you to specify frequently used print settings and

apply them to documents much as you apply style sheets. P

•Meta Tags: Meta tags contain information about a Web page. They’re not

displayed in a Web browser, but adding meta tags to your Web documents

can make it easier for search engines to index your pages. Create new meta

tag sets to be incorporated into exported HTML pages. W

•Menus: A menu is a list of items that can display in a list control or a pop-up

menu control within a form box. You can use menus to let users choose from

a list of options, or you can create navigation menus where each item has a

corresponding URL. Create new menus to be used in forms that are part of

QuarkXPress Web documents. W

2To choose a default auxiliary dictionary for all new documents, choose

Utilities &Auxiliary Dictionary. Use the dialog box to locate an auxiliary

dictionary and click Open. Or, click New to create a default auxiliary dictionary.

3When you are ﬁnished modifying default settings, create a new document.

All your modifications are reflected in the new document. You can still

modify these settings in individual documents.

∫Print styles are always saved with the application preferences, even if you have

a document open when you create or edit a print style.

åEach time you create a new document, all the settings in the New Document

dialog box (File &New &Document) or New Web Document dialog box

(File &New &Web Document) become the new default settings. Any palettes

that are open when you quit QuarkXPress, including library palettes, will be

open the next time you launch QuarkXPress.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Setting Default Values

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 2

SETTING PREFERENCES

QuarkXPress uses a variety of default preferences as the basis for all new documents.

For example, you can specify the measurement system displayed on horizontal and

vertical rulers. You can modify the default preferences by changing them when

no documents are open. Default preferences can be modified in the panes of the

Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

MODIFYING APPLICATION PREFERENCES

The controls in the Application panes of the Preferences dialog box affect the

way QuarkXPress works with all documents — for example, how it displays and

saves documents. These settings are saved with the application and are never

saved with documents. To modify application preferences:

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences to display the Preferences

dialog box.

2Click the items in the list at the left to display different types of preferences. For

specific information about the controls in any of the panes, see Chapter 4,

“Edit Menu,” in A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.

•The Display pane provides options for how guides, documents, picture

previews, and so on, display on-screen.

•The Interactive pane lets you control scrolling and several text

handling options.

•The Save pane provides features for automatically saving documents, saving

revisions of documents, saving libraries, and saving the document position.

•The XTensions Manager pane lets you control whether the XTensions

Manager dialog box displays when you launch QuarkXPress.

•The Browsers pane (Mac OS) allows you to specify which Web browsers you

want to use to preview your Web documents. W

3Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box and save your changes. The

changes take effect immediately.

∫Print styles are always saved with the application preferences, even if you have

a document open when you create or edit a print style.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Setting Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 3

åTo provide maximum ﬂexibility, QuarkXPress saves various default settings and

preferences in different ways. Default settings such as style sheets are saved in

the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle (inside the “Preferences” folder). Default settings for

Web documents are saved in the “Web Preferences” (“Web.prf”) ﬁle (also inside

the “Preferences” folder). For information about saving preferences, see

“Saving QuarkXPress Preferences” in this chapter.

Application preferences and default document preferences are saved in the

“XPress Preferences”ﬁle. For information about application and document

preferences, see “Saving QuarkXPress Preferences” in this chapter.

MODIFYING DOCUMENT PREFERENCES

The Document panes in the Preferences dialog box affect the way certain

QuarkXPress features work with documents — for example, whether pages

are inserted automatically when text overflows and how colors trap. If you

modify settings in the Document panes of the Preferences dialog box when

no documents are open, the settings become application default settings and

affect all new documents. However, if you modify document settings when a

document is open, the settings are applied to and saved only with the active

document. To modify default document preferences:

1Make sure no documents are open.

2Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences to display the Preferences

dialog box.

3In the list on the left, click the items under Default Document or Default Web

Document to display panes containing different sets of document preferences.

For speciﬁc information about the controls in any of the panes, see Chapter 4,

“Edit Menu,” in A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.

•The General pane lets you specify default settings for greeking, guides, master

page items, auto picture import, framing, hyperlink and anchor color, and

automatic page insertion.

•The Measurements pane lets you specify a default measurement system.

•The Paragraph pane lets you specify the default settings for paragraph-based

typography features, including leading, baseline grid, and hyphenation method.

•The Character pane lets you specify the default settings for character-based

typography features, including ligatures (Mac OS only), automatic kerning, and

the size and position of superscript, subscript, small caps, and superior characters.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Setting Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 4

•The Tools pane lets you specify the default settings for the Zoom tool Zand

each item creation tool. For example, you can specify the minimum and maxi-

mum view for the Zoom tool, and you can specify the default background color

for boxes and the default style for lines. You can also reset the tools to the

original default settings.

You can double-click any item creation tool or the Zoom tool Zin the Tools

palette to display the Tools pane in the Preferences dialog box. In the Tools

pane, you can select multiple tools and edit their preferences simultaneously.

Press Shift while you click to select a consecutive range of tools; press C

(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click to select nonconsecutive tools.

You can modify any attributes common to all the selected tools.

You can specify settings for the Image Map tools and the Form tool in the

Tools pane under Default Web Document.

•The Trapping pane lets you specify the values QuarkXPress uses when trapping

print documents automatically. By specifying trapping relationships between

colors, you can avoid the white areas that can occur when printing plates are

misaligned or when paper shifts or stretches on a commercial printing press. P

•The Layer pane lets you specify whether new layers should maintain their

runaround, be visible, be locked, or have their printout suppressed. (You can

only suppress items in print documents.)

4When you are ﬁnished modifying default preferences, create a new document.

All your modifications are reflected in the new document. You can modify

preferences for individual documents by choosing Edit &Preferences &

Preferences when a document is open.

CREATING KERNING AND TRACKING TABLES AND

HYPHENATION EXCEPTIONS

You can modify default settings for kerning table information, tracking table

information, and hyphenation exceptions. If you change any of these default set-

tings when a document is open, the change is saved with the document and in the

“XPress Preferences” file. For information about saving preferences, see “Saving

QuarkXPress Preferences”and “Understanding Nonmatching Preferences” in this

chapter. To modify kerning tables, tracking tables, and hyphenation exceptions:

1If you are planning to edit kerning tables or tracking tables, make sure the

Kern-Track Editor QuarkXTensions software is running. (For information about

loading XTensions modules, see “Using XTensions Software” in this chapter.)

2Make sure no documents are open.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Setting Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 5

3Edit any of the following default settings:

•To edit the default kerning tables, choose Utilities &Kerning Edit. Use the

Kerning Edit dialog box to modify kerning pairs for individual fonts.

•To edit the default tracking tables, choose Utilities &Tracking Edit. Use the

Tracking Edit dialog box to modify the tracking tables for individual fonts.

•To create or modify the default list of hyphenation exceptions, choose

Utilities &Hyphenation Exceptions.

4When you are finished modifying default settings, create a new document.

All your modifications are reflected in the new document.

∫Creating kerning and tracking tables can be time-consuming. You could lose

your kerning and tracking tables if the “XPress Preferences” file becomes

damaged. To avoid losing your settings, routinely make backup copies of

your “XPress Preferences” file.

For specific information about the controls in the Kerning Edit dialog box,

the Tracking Edit dialog box, or the Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box,

see Chapter 9, “Utilities Menu,” in A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.

SAVING QUARKXPRESS PREFERENCES

QuarkXPress is a powerful application that offers many options for controlling docu-

ment display and text ﬂow. Because each person has different needs, QuarkXPress lets

each user or organization store and use favorite settings in the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle.

The “XPress Preferences” ﬁle, located in the QuarkXPress application folder, includes

default sets of style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, lists,

dashes and stripes, and print styles; default auxiliary dictionary path information;

application preference settings; document preference settings; kerning tables; tracking

tables; hyphenation exceptions; XTensions Manager settings; and PPD Manager

settings. These different types of settings and preferences are saved in the “XPress

Preferences” ﬁle in different ways.

CHANGES TO QUARKXPRESS PREFERENCES

Changes to QuarkXPress preferences are handled in the following ways:

•If you make changes to application preferences (Edit &Preferences &

Preferences &items listed under Application) with or without documents

open, the changes are saved in the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle and immediately

affect all open documents and all subsequently opened documents.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Creating Kerning and Tracking Tables and Hyphenation Exceptions

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 6

•If you make changes to XTensions Manager (Utilities menu) settings with or

without documents open, the changes are saved in the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle

and affect all documents after you relaunch QuarkXPress.

•If you make changes to PPD Manager (Utilities menu) settings with or

without documents open, the changes are saved in the “XPress Preferences”

file and immediately affect all open documents and all subsequently

opened documents. P

•If you make changes to document preferences (Edit &Preferences &

Preferences &items listed under Document or Web Document) with a

document open, the changes are saved only with the active document.

•If you choose a different auxiliary dictionary with a document open, the change

is saved only with the active document.

•If you make changes to the kerning table information, tracking table informa-

tion, and hyphenation exceptions in a new document, these changes are saved

with the active document and in the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle.

•If the Nonmatching Preferences alert displays when opening a document and

you click Use XPress Preferences, changes you make to the kerning table

information, tracking table information, and hyphenation exceptions will

be stored both in that document and in the “XPress Preferences” file.

NONMATCHING PREFERENCES ALERT

QuarkXPress displays the Nonmatching Preferences alert when you open a

document that was last saved with kerning table information, tracking table

information, or hyphenation exceptions that are different from the settings

contained in the current “XPress Preferences” ﬁle. You have the option of using

the settings in the document or those in the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle.

The Nonmatching Preferences alert displays when you open a document with kerning

table information, tracking table information, or hyphenation exceptions that are different

from the settings in the current “XPress Preferences” ﬁle.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Saving QuarkXPress Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 7

USE XPRESS PREFERENCES BUTTON

If you click Use XPress Preferences, the preference information that had been

saved with the document is ignored. Text may reﬂow because of different auto-

matic kerning or tracking information, or different hyphenation exceptions.

Changes you make to these settings while the document is active are stored

both in the document and in the “XPress Preferences”ﬁle.

The advantage of the Use XPress Preferences feature is that the document will

be based on the same kerning table information, tracking table information,

and hyphenation exceptions as your other documents.

After clicking Use XPress Preferences in the Nonmatching Preferences

alert, look over the document and see what has happened to it. If the reﬂow

or changes are undesirable, choose File &Revert to Saved. The Nonmatching

Preferences dialog box will display again and you can click Keep

Document Settings.

KEEP DOCUMENT SETTINGS BUTTON

If you click Keep Document Settings, text will not reﬂow. Automatic kerning,

tracking, or hyphenation exception changes made while the document is active

will be stored only with the document. The Keep Document Settings feature

is useful if you want to open and print a document without running the risk

of text reﬂow.

UNDERSTANDING NONMATCHING PREFERENCES

When you open a document in QuarkXPress, you will sometimes see the Non-

matching Preferences alert. If you are unfamiliar with this dialog box, it may

seem alarming. Understanding the two choices in the dialog box (Use XPress

Preferences and Keep Document Settings) will help you decide which option

to choose.

THE NONMATCHING PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX

Let’s say you’ve just brought a document over to a co-worker’s computer so

you can print it to their laser printer. But when your co-worker opens your

document, an alert is displayed: “Some settings saved with this document

are different from those in the ‘XPress Preferences’ file.” Below this are two

buttons: Use XPress Preferences and Keep Document Settings. What do

you do?

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Saving QuarkXPress Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 8

When you see the Nonmatching Preferences alert, it means your document’s

preferences are different from the preferences stored in the “XPress Preferences”

file that is currently installed. Since all the preferences in question are stored

with the document, you can avoid any reflow problems by clicking Keep

Document Settings — but are you sure this is what you want to do? Before you

can answer that question, you need to know a little more about what’s in the

“XPress Preferences” ﬁle and how it works.

åIf you click Use XPress Preferences in the Nonmatching Preferences alert, look

over the document and see what has happened to it. If the reﬂow or changes are

undesirable, choose File &Revert to Saved. The Nonmatching Preferences

alert will display again and you can click Keep Document Settings.

WHAT’S IN THE XPRESS PREFERENCES FILE?

Let’s take a look at what the “XPress Preferences”ﬁle contains. (We have divided

the list into three groups according to how they are saved.)

GROUP A

•Kerning tables (Utilities &Kerning Edit)

•Tracking tables (Utilities &Tracking Edit)

•Hyphenation exceptions (Utilities &Hyphenation Exceptions)

GROUP B

•Default style sheets, colors, dashes and frames, lists, and hyphenation and

justification specifications (Edit menu)

•Settings in the Document panes of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences)

•Path information for the default auxiliary dictionary (Utilities &

Auxiliary Dictionary)

GROUP C

•Print styles (Edit &Print Styles)

•Settings in the XTensions Manager and PPD Manager dialog boxes

(Utilities menu)

•Settings in the Application panes of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences)

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Understanding Nonmatching Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 9

GROUP A: CHOOSE YOUR BUTTONS WITH CARE

If the Nonmatching Preferences alert displays when you open a document, it

means that one or more of the document’s group A settings are different from

those in the current “XPress Preferences”ﬁle. This means that your document

could look different depending on whether or not you choose to use the docu-

ment’s settings. For example, a sentence that should end on page three could

end on page four instead because of differences in kerning or tracking.

So which button do you click? If you want the document to look exactly the

same on your co-worker’s computer as it did on your computer, click the Keep

Document Settings button. (This is always the appropriate choice for opening

documents at a service bureau.)

However, if you click the Keep Document Settings button, the Nonmatching

Preferences alert will continue to display every time your friend opens this

document on his or her machine. If another user is going to be keeping the ﬁle

from now on, this could become tedious. If you click Use XPress Preferences

and resave the document, the Nonmatching Preferences alert will no longer

display when the document is opened on the other user’s computer because you

will have replaced the document’s preferences with those in the current “XPress

Preferences”ﬁle. However, you should only click Use XPress Preferences if:

•The document’s kerning, tracking, and hyphenation need to be consistent with

other documents produced on this computer, or;

•The document’s kerning, tracking, and hyphenation are relatively unimportant.

If you click Use XPress Preferences, look through the document before you save

it. Look for the overﬂow symbol tin text boxes, for undesirable line breaks, and

for any other changes.

GROUP B: NO ALERT, NO PROBLEM

If your settings for group B (style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justiﬁca-

tion specifications, and so on) are different from those in another user’s

“XPress Preferences”ﬁle, the Nonmatching Preferences alert will not display.

The document’s settings will be used automatically, and any changes you make

to those settings will apply to that document only.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Understanding Nonmatching Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 10

GROUP C: DON’T WORRY ABOUT IT

Like group B, differences among group C settings (print styles, PPD information,

and so on) will not cause the Nonmatching Preferences alert to display.

The information does not affect individual documents and is not saved

with documents.

WHERE ARE PREFERENCE CHANGES SAVED?

•Any changes you make to the settings in group A or B while no documents are

open are stored in the “XPress Preferences”ﬁle, and are used for all subsequently

created documents.

•Any changes you make to the settings in group B while a document is open are

saved with that document only.

•Any changes you make to settings in group C are always stored in the “XPress

Preferences”ﬁle, whether or not a document is open.

•If the Nonmatching Preferences alert displays when you open a document,

and you click Use XPress Preferences, subsequent changes you make to set-

tings in group A are saved to both the document and the “XPress Preferences”

ﬁle. (The document’s original group A settings are discarded when you click

Use XPress Preferences.)

•If the Nonmatching Preferences alert displays when you open a document, and

you click Keep Document Settings, subsequent changes you make to settings in

group A are saved only with the document.

∫Standard bitmap frames (those included with QuarkXPress) will not generate a

nonmatching preferences alert. A document containing standard bitmap frames

will open and retain its bitmap frames. However, since only QuarkXPress 4.x

and earlier have the ability to use Frame Editor and bitmap frames, you cannot

edit the bitmap frames or add them to your default “XPress Preferences” ﬁle.

Custom bitmap frames (created in Frame Editor) will generate a nonmatching

preferences alert; just like standard bitmap frames, you cannot edit them or add

them to your default “XPress Preferences” ﬁle.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Understanding Nonmatching Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 11

USING XTENSIONS SOFTWARE

XTensions modules are add-on software that enhance the features of QuarkXPress.

Examples of XTensions software included with QuarkXPress are the ﬁlters used to

import and export text in the formats of many word processing applications, the

Kern-Track Editor, and Custom Bleeds. In addition to the QuarkXTensions modules

that come with QuarkXPress, third-party software developers have created many

XTensions modules to meet specialized publishing needs.

SPECIFYING WHICH XTENSIONS MODULES TO USE

The XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) lets you control which

XTensions modules are loaded with QuarkXPress. XTensions software consume

RAM (memory), so you should run only the ones you need. To specify which

XTensions modules to use:

1Choose Utilities &XTensions Manager. The dialog box lists all the

XTensions software in the “XTension” folder and the “XTension Disabled”

folder within your QuarkXPress application folder.

Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to specify which XTensions modules

should load and to create sets of XTensions modules.

2To specify which XTensions modules load, you can choose a default set,

temporarily change the status of individual XTensions modules, or create

a new set.

•To choose a default set, use the Set pop-up menu. Choose All XTensions

Enabled to let QuarkXPress load all your XTensions software. Choose All

XTensions Disabled if you don’t want any XTensions software to load.

•To change the status of individual XTensions modules, click in the Enable

column or choose Yes or No from the Enable pop-up menu. To edit the status

of multiple XTensions modules: Press Shift while you click to select consecutive

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Using XTensions Software

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 12

XTensions modules; press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click to

select nonconsecutive XTensions modules.

•To create a new set of XTensions software based on those currently enabled,

click Save As and enter a name in the Enter name for current set field.

The new set will display in the Set pop-up menu for future use.

3Click OK; relaunch QuarkXPress to load the new XTensions set.

åWhen you install QuarkXPress, all included XTensions modules are enabled by

default. To conserve RAM, you should carefully review the XTensions modules

that are running and disable any that you will not be using.

Pressing the space bar while launching QuarkXPress displays the XTensions

Manager dialog box so you can specify which XTensions modules will load. The

XTensions Manager pane in the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &

Preferences) lets you control the default display of the XTensions Manager

dialog box at launch.

If you have various clients or documents that require different XTensions soft-

ware, you can create a different XTensions software set for each situation.

IMPORT/EXPORT FILTERS

QuarkXPress provides import/export ﬁlters that let you transfer ﬁles between

QuarkXPress and popular word processing applications. You can also save and

import ASCII ﬁles, including those with XPress Tags information. Supported text

file formats include Microsoft Word, RTF (Windows only), and WordPerfect.

QuarkXPress also includes import filters for certain picture file formats,

including PhotoCD.

Import/export ﬁlters are actually XTensions software and are controlled by the

XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu). To import text or pictures in

any of these formats, or to export text in any of these formats, the appropriate

import/export ﬁlters must be loaded.

QUARKXTENSIONS SOFTWARE

QuarkXPress includes several QuarkXTensions modules that add core features

to the application, including the Index QuarkXTensions module, and the

Kern-Track Editor.

THIRD-PARTY XTENSIONS SOFTWARE

Hundreds of third-party software developers are currently producing a wide

range of XTensions software that let QuarkXPress meet specialized publishing

needs. Custom XTensions modules are also available for advertising agencies,

graphic designers, newspaper publishers, magazine publishers, database

publishers, and output providers.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Using XTensions Software

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 13

MANAGING PRINT STYLES AND PPDS P

QuarkXPress lets you customize printing features by saving output settings as print

styles and controlling which PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) load with

QuarkXPress. The print styles and PPD information are stored in the “XPress

Preferences” file. To create and use print styles, see Chapter 23, “Output.”

CREATING AND EDITING PRINT STYLES P

Print styles are predeﬁned output setups you can choose from the Print Style

pop-up menu in the Print dialog box (File &Print). Print styles are not docu-

ment-speciﬁc; they are global preferences that can be saved, exported, imported,

and used with any QuarkXPress document. To create or edit a print style:

1Choose Edit &Print Styles.

Use the Print Styles dialog box (Edit menu) to create and edit print styles for use with all

your documents. Use the Export button to share print styles with other users.

2Edit the Default print style to reflect the print settings you use the most.

Create new print styles to include with all new documents.

3Click Save.

åIf you click either the Print or Capture Settings button in the Print dialog box,

the current print settings are saved with the document when you save

(File &Save) the document.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Managing Print Styles and PPDs

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 14

SPECIFYING WHICH PPDS TO USE P

PostScript Printer Description ﬁles (PPDs) let you choose device-speciﬁc features

for a particular PostScript printer, such as an alternate paper size and optimized

screen values. Printer manufacturers provide PPDs for their printers. If you do

not have a PPD for your device, you can use one of the three default PPDs:

Generic B&W, Generic Color, or Generic Imagesetter.

PPDs are accessed through the Printer Description pop-up menu in the

Page Setup dialog box (File menu). You can control which PPDs display in

the Printer Description pop-up menu by using the PPD Manager dialog

box (Utilities menu). To specify which PPDs are available:

1Choose Utilities &PPD Manager.

Use the PPD Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to specify which PPDs are available.

2Click Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) in the System PPD Folder area

to specify the folder that contains the PPDs you want to access. By default,

QuarkXPress accesses the PPDs in the following folder:

•Mac OS: The “Printer Descriptions” folder in the “Extensions” folder within

your System Folder.

•Windows: The “System” folder in the “Windows” folder. (Windows NT:

Win_NT &System 3x &Spool &Drivers &w32x86 &0 [zero])

3To specify which PPDs are accessible, click in the Include column or choose

Yes or No from the Include pop-up menu. To edit the status of multiple

PPDs: Press Shift while you click to select a consecutive range of PPDs; press

C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click to select a nonconsecutive

range of PPDs.

4Click OK; changes take effect immediately.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Managing Print Styles and PPDs

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 15

åEach time you launch QuarkXPress, the application looks at all the PPDs avail-

able to see if any have been added, deleted, or changed. If you have many PPDs,

QuarkXPress may take longer to launch.

To speed launch time, remove PPDs that you do not need. Look in the “Printer

Descriptions” folder inside the “Extensions” folder (Mac OS) or the “System”

folder inside the “Windows” folder (Windows) and in the “PPD” folder (if you

have one) in your QuarkXPress application folder. Place any unnecessary PPDs

in a different folder.

USING APPLE EVENTS SCRIPTS — MAC OS ONLY

Apple events scripts are small programs that let you automate repetitive tasks,

customize QuarkXPress, and link QuarkXPress to other applications. Publishers use

scripts for everything from simple text formatting to complex database publishing.

Writing scripts requires some programming knowledge and dedication to learning a

scripting language. Once scripts are written, anyone can use them to enhance their

productivity in QuarkXPress.

WRITING SCRIPTS

Scripts written for QuarkXPress are based on the Apple Events Object Model, a

common language that lets Mac OS applications talk to each other. Objects are

the elements of an application (for example, a picture box); each object has

speciﬁc capabilities. Events are verbs that tell objects what to do. Depending

on the capabilities of the object, it can perform different events.

To write scripts, you combine objects with events. Essentially, you are giving

orders to speciﬁc objects. The syntax is deﬁned by the scripting language you

use: AppleScript™or UserTalk (in UserLand Frontier). For information

about writing scripts for QuarkXPress, see the documentation in the Apple

Events Scripting folder on the QuarkXPress CD-ROM.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Managing Print Styles and PPDs

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 16

USING SCRIPTS

Consult your Mac OS or scripting software documentation for information

about the system extensions that must be running for you to use scripts. The

various methods for accessing and running scripts depend on how the script

was created. For example, you can create a drag-and-drop application that will

run when you drop QuarkXPress ﬁles on it. Or, you can use XTensions software

to add a menu or palette to QuarkXPress that provides access to your scripts.

åFor information about writing scripts for QuarkXPress, see the documents in the

Apple Events Scripting folder on the QuarkXPress CD-ROM.

AppleScript ships with most versions of Mac OS. UserLand Frontier is available

from many online services.

Chapter 1: Customizing QuarkXPress

Using Apple Events Scripts — Mac OS Only

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 17

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

You can arrange ﬂowers by placing them directly in a vase or by carefully positioning

each one. The ﬂowers placed directly in the vase look good, but the carefully positioned

flowers can be a masterpiece of design. QuarkXPress operates on a similar principle,

letting you position items by clicking and dragging the mouse or by using layout tools

for precision and control. Clicking and dragging is intuitive and can look great, but

when you need to create a complex design, the precision tools will serve you best.

QuarkXPress provides a number of on-screen layout tools that allow extreme precision

in arranging your items, as well as a variety of controls that help you arrange docu-

ments on-screen and navigate through documents. Using these tools and controls

will help you make each document a triumph of design.

ARRANGING DOCUMENTS

QuarkXPress lets you automatically arrange open documents on-screen by giving you

options to control the way open documents are displayed. You can stack or cascade

documents, you can tile documents, or you can stack or tile all open documents to

a specific view size. The Windows submenu (View menu) on Mac OS and the

Window menu on Windows provide access to these display controls.

ARRANGING DOCUMENTS ON MAC OS

On Mac OS, you can use the Windows submenu (View &Windows) to control

the way open windows are displayed on-screen. The ﬁrst section of the submenu

lets you specify how open documents are displayed:

•To display open documents stacked to the right and down, choose View &

Windows &Stack Documents. The Stack Documents command layers multi-

ple open documents so a small portion of each document’s menu bar displays.

•To reduce the size of each window and distribute them evenly on your screen(s),

choose View &Windows &Tile Documents. The Tile Documents command

resizes document windows so that equal portions of all open documents display

on-screen. The active document always displays in the upper left part of the

monitor; the most recently active documents are displayed from left to right and

top to bottom. If Tile to Multiple Monitors is checked in the Display pane of

the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences), you can use

more than one monitor for tiling documents.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Arranging Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 18

The second section of the Windows submenu lists all open documents and

lets you choose which one to display. You can also display the Clipboard if

it is open.

To change all documents to the same view when stacking or tiling, press the

following modiﬁer keys while you choose Stack Documents or Tile Documents

(View &Windows). You must press the modiﬁer key before you click the menu

bar to choose View.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

STACK OR TILE TO DOCUMENT VIEW KEYBOARD COMMAND

Actual Size Control

Fit in Window PC

Thumbnails POption

åPress Shift while clicking a document’s title bar to display the

Windows submenu.

To drag thumbnails of pages between documents, the document windows must

be resized so each is showing and each document must be in Thumbnails view.

You can accomplish this quickly by pressing Option while you choose View &

Windows &Tile Documents, or press Option+Shift while you click a docu-

ment’s title bar and choose Tile Documents. P

ARRANGING DOCUMENTS ON WINDOWS P

On Windows, you can use the Window menu to control the way open windows

are displayed on-screen. The ﬁrst section of the submenu lets you specify how

open documents are displayed:

•To display open documents stacked to the right and down, choose Window &

Cascade. The Cascade command layers multiple open documents so a small

portion of each document’s title bar displays.

•To resize document windows so they all display stacked from top-to-bottom on

the screen, choose Window &Tile Horizontally.

•To resize document windows so they all display side-by-side, with the title bars

adjacent to each other beginning at the top of the screen, choose Window &

Tile Vertically.

If four or more documents are open, the Tile Horizontally and Tile Vertically

commands arrange document windows so all open documents and an open

Clipboard display on-screen. The active document is always displayed in the

upper left or top of the monitor.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Arranging Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 19

To change all documents to the same view when cascading or tiling, press

the following modifier keys while you choose Cascade, Tile Horizontally,

or Tile Vertically from the Window menu.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

STACK OR TILE TO DOCUMENT VIEW KEYBOARD COMMAND

Actual Size Ctrl+Alt

Fit in Window PCtrl

Thumbnails PAlt

åWhen multiple documents are open, press Ctrl+Tab to move through all open

documents. To switch to the previous document, press Ctrl+Shift+Tab.

NAVIGATING THROUGH DOCUMENTS

QuarkXPress provides several ways to navigate through a document: Page menu

commands, the Page ﬁeld, Document Layout palette icons, the go-to-page pop-up

menu, and scroll bars. After experimenting with the various options, you will ﬁnd a

method that works best for you.

USING PAGE MENU COMMANDS

The Page menu commands let you “turn” the pages of a document, jump to

speciﬁc pages, and display master pages.

•To turn the pages of a document, choose Previous, Next, First, or Last from

the Page menu.

åWhen any tool except the Zoom tool is selected, and Caps Lock is not turned

on, you can press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to access the Page Grabber

Hand H. The Page Grabber Hand Hlets you scroll through a page in any

direction by dragging the mouse. In a print document, you can use the Page

Grabber Hand Hto scroll to another page.

•To display a speciﬁc document page, choose Page &Go to (C+J on Mac OS,

Ctrl+J on Windows). Enter the number of the page you want to display in the

Go to Page ﬁeld and click OK.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Arranging Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 20

∫If your print document is divided into sections, precede the page number you

enter with the preﬁx characters you speciﬁed for the section in the Preﬁxﬁeld

of the Section dialog box (Page &Section). You can also specify absolute page

numbers in the Go to Page dialog box. An absolute page number indicates the

page’s actual position in a document, regardless of any sectioning or special

numbering. To specify an absolute page number, precede the number you enter

in the Go to Page dialog box with a plus (+) sign.

•To display a master page, choose Page &Display. From the Display submenu,

choose the master page you want to display. To display the document page again,

choose Document from the Display submenu.

åTo display the top of the first page of a document, press Home (Mac OS) or

Ctrl+Page Up (Windows).

To scroll up one screen, press Page Up.

To scroll to the top of the previous page, press Shift+Page Up.

To scroll down one screen, press Page Down.

To scroll down to the top of the next page, press Shift+Page Down.

Mac OS only: To display the bottom of the last page of the document, press End.

To display the top of the last page of the document, press Shift+End (Mac OS)

or Ctrl+Page Down (Windows).

USING THE DOCUMENT LAYOUT PALETTE

The Document Layout palette lets you display document pages and master

pages by clicking icons. To display the Document Layout palette, choose

View &Show Document Layout (F10 on Mac OS, F4 on Windows). To display

a master page, double-click its icon (in the middle portion of the palette). To dis-

play a document page, double-click its icon (in the lower portion of the palette).

Double-click icons in the Document Layout palette (View menu) to display a document

page or a master page.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Navigating Through Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 21

USING THE PAGE FIELD

The Page ﬁeld in the lower left corner of the document window is editable. To

display a speciﬁc page, select the number in this ﬁeld and enter a new number.

Select the number in the Page ﬁeld (in the lower left corner of the document window) and

enter a new page number.

USING THE GO-TO-PAGE POP-UP MENU

In addition to the Document Layout palette, QuarkXPress provides a pop-up

menu of page icons in the lower left corner of the document window. Click

the Page pop-up arrow , next to the Page field to display the go-to-page

pop-up menu. Drag to select master pages (on the left) and document pages

(on the right).

Click the Page pop-up arrow ,in the lower left corner of the document window to display

icons for document pages and master pages.

SCROLLING THROUGH A DOCUMENT

You can navigate through a document using the scroll boxes and the scroll

arrows on the right edge and bottom of the document window. In a print

document, you can change pages using these scroll boxes and scroll arrows;

however, because pages in a Web document have no ﬁxed height, you cannot

scroll to another page in a Web document.

•To use a scroll box, click and drag it. If you use the scroll box to change pages

in a print document, the Page ﬁeld in the lower left corner of the document

window updates.

•To use the scroll arrows, click an arrow to scroll incrementally in that direction

(up, down, right, or left). Click and hold an arrow to scroll through the

page continuously.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Navigating Through Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 22

åTo improve speed while scrolling, check Speed Scroll in the Interactive pane of

the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

The QuarkXPress Speed Scroll feature greeks pictures and displays two-color

blends in a single color while you are scrolling. It redraws them when you

stop scrolling.

You can set a preference to “live scroll” when you drag a scroll box. During

a live scroll, the document window is updated automatically and displays

the document as you drag the scroll box. To use live scroll all the time, check

Live Scroll in the Interactive pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences).

Mac OS only: To toggle Live Scroll, press Option before you click the scroll bar

and while you drag it. If Live Scroll is checked, pressing Option will disable it.

If Live Scroll is unchecked, pressing Option will enable it.

CHANGING DOCUMENT VIEWS

QuarkXPress lets you reduce or enlarge the document view in .1% increments. You can

switch between predeﬁned page views using menu commands and keyboard commands,

you can enter a custom view percentage, and you can enlarge speciﬁc areas using the

Zoom tool

CHOOSING A PREDEFINED PAGE VIEW

To specify a predefined page view, choose an option from the View menu:

50%, 75%, Actual Size (C+1 on Mac OS, Ctrl+1 on Windows), or 200%.

In a print document, you can also choose Fit in Window (C+0 on Mac OS,

Ctrl+0 on Windows) or Thumbnails (Shift+F6)

åWhen Thumbnails (View menu) is selected, you can reposition pages by drag-

ging them to a different location in the document. You can also drag pages to

another open document that is also displaying pages in Thumbnails view. P

ENTERING A CUSTOM VIEW PERCENTAGE

To specify a document view other than one listed in the View menu, select

the number in the View Percentage ﬁeld (Control+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+V

on Windows) in the lower left corner of the document window. Enter a value

and press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Mac OS or Windows).

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Navigating Through Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 23

USING THE ZOOM TOOL Z

To enlarge the document view in preset intervals, select the Zoom tool Zand

click on the document. To reduce the document view in preset intervals, press

Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while you click the Zoom tool Z. To specify

the portion of the document you want to zoom in on or out from, use the

Zoom tool Zto drag a marquee around the area you want to view.

∫You can customize the zoom increment and the maximum and minimum

reduction and enlargement values obtainable with the Zoom tool Zby

specifying values in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences).

åYou can temporarily select the Zoom tool Zby pressing Control+Shift (Mac OS)

or Ctrl+space (Windows). On Mac OS, this key command can be changed to

Control in the Control Key area of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Prefer-

ences &Preferences &Interactive pane). Press Control+Option (Mac OS) or

Ctrl+Alt+space (Windows) to zoom out.

Windows only: The maximum zoom percentage depends upon the Display DPI

Value (Edit & Preferences & Preferences & Display pane). If the value is set

above 85 dpi, the maximum zoom percentage decreases. For example, a value

of 96 dpi restricts the maximum zoom percentage to 692%.

USING THE PASTEBOARD P

The pasteboard is the nonprinting area that surrounds individual pages and spreads.

The pasteboard can function both as a work area and as a temporary storage area. You

can create items and groups on the pasteboard, then drag them from the pasteboard

onto a document page. You can also use the pasteboard to “bleed” an item off a page.

åThe pasteboard is not available in Web documents.

USING THE PASTEBOARD AS A WORK AREA P

You construct and modify items and groups on the pasteboard just as you

would a document page. You can drag items from a pasteboard to any other

document page or pasteboard. The pasteboard works as follows:

•To create items on the pasteboard, scroll left or right so that a page’s pasteboard

area displays. Create, position, and group items on the pasteboard just as you

would on a document page.

•To move an item from the pasteboard to a document page or another pasteboard,

select the Item tool e, click the item, and drag it into position.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Changing Document Views

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 24

•You can move an item so that it is partially off the left or right edge of the

pasteboard. When you do so, the portion that you move off the edge is not

visible. It is not possible to move an item completely off the pasteboard.

•When you drag out a horizontal ruler guide and release the gpointer over

the pasteboard, the guide displays across the pasteboard and all the pages in a

spread. If you release the gpointer when it is positioned over a document page,

the guide displays only on that page.

åYou may ﬁnd it convenient to store items on the pasteboard until you are ready

to place them on a document page. If you plan to store a variety of items,

consider using a library. To create a library, see Chapter 16, “Libraries.”

USING THE PASTEBOARD FOR BLEEDS P

Bleed is the term used to describe items that are printed to the edge of a ﬁnished

page. You can create a bleed item with QuarkXPress by extending it from a

document page onto the pasteboard, and then entering the distance you want

to extend the bleed in the Print dialog box Bleed field (File &Print &

Document tab). Once a page with bleed elements is reproduced on press, a

commercial printer can trim the document to its ﬁnished page size.

∫You can specify the size of the pasteboard by entering a percentage value in the

Pasteboard Width field in the Display pane of the Preferences dialog box

(Edit &Preferences &Preferences). By default, the area of the pasteboard to

the left and to the right of a page or spread is equal to the document’s page

width, and .5" of pasteboard displays above and below pages and spreads.

When the width of the widest horizontal spread in a document approaches 48",

the width of the pasteboard areas to the right and to the left of the spread is

reduced to stay within the 48" document width limit.

USING RULERS AND GUIDES

The rulers and guides in QuarkXPress give you precise control for document layout.

You can control the measurement system displayed on rulers and you can customize

the color of guides. QuarkXPress provides margin guides and column guides for aligning

text, and lets you create all the ruler guides you need for aligning items. To ensure that

items are placed properly, you can “snap” items to guides.

DISPLAYING RULERS AND GUIDES

Use the View menu commands to display rulers and guides. To display rulers,

choose View &Show Rulers (C+R on Mac OS, Ctrl+R on Windows). To display

guides, choose View &Show Guides (F7).

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Using the Pasteboard

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 25

∫By default, margin guides and column guides display as blue lines on color mon-

itors and as dotted gray lines on black-and-white monitors. Ruler guides display

as green lines on color monitors and as dotted gray lines on black-and-white

monitors. You can specify different colors for margin and ruler guides and

the baseline grid in the Display pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences).

You can display page guides either In Front of or Behind all items, depending

on the setting you choose from the Guides area in the General pane of the

Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

SPECIFYING THE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM FOR RULERS

To specify ruler measurement units, choose options from the Horizontal

and Vertical pop-up menus in the Measurements pane of the Preferences

dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

The Vertical and Horizontal options you choose are used by QuarkXPress in

all ﬁelds that indicate position values. For example, if you choose Inches from

the Vertical pop-up menu and Picas from the Horizontal pop-up menu, the

value in the Origin Down ﬁeld (in item speciﬁcation dialog boxes) displays in

inches; the value in the Origin Across ﬁeld displays in picas.

You can specify different measurement units for your print documents and

Web documents.

åThe Snap to Guides feature helps you quickly align items with ruler guides and

page guides. When Snap to Guides is checked (View menu), an item or Item

Creation pointer csnaps to a guide when you drag it within the snap distance.

The Snap Distance is speciﬁed in pixels in the General pane of the Preferences

dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

SPECIFYING COLUMN GUIDES AND MARGIN GUIDES P

QuarkXPress automatically places column guides and margin guides in all new

documents. You specify their position in the Column Guides and Margin

Guides ﬁelds in the New Document dialog box (File &New &Document).

When a master page is displayed in the document window, you can use the

Master Guides dialog box (Page &Master Guides) to change the placement

of column guides and margin guides.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Using Rulers and Guides

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 26

If you check Automatic Text Box in the New Document dialog box (File &

New &Document), the values you specify in the Margin Guides area deﬁne

the size and placement of the automatic text box. The values you specify in the

Column Guides area define the columns for the automatic text box. If you

do not check Automatic Text Box when you open a new document, column

guides are displayed, but the values are not applied to any text box.

åMargin guides and column guides information is stored as part of a master page.

To reposition margin guides and page guides in an existing document, display

the master page that contains the guides you want to reposition, then choose

Page & Master Guides. The Master Guides dialog box displays. Edit the values

in the Margin Guides and Column Guides area of the Master Guides dialog

box to reposition margin and column guides on the master page and on all

document pages based on that master page.

SPECIFYING THE PAGE WIDTH GUIDE W

QuarkXPress automatically places a page width reference guide in all new docu-

ments to indicate the right edge of the design area. You specify the default

page width for a document in the Layout area of the New Web Document

dialog box (File &New &Web Document).

•To specify a page width that is the same for all browser windows, enter a value

in pixels in the Page Width ﬁeld or choose a standard width value from the

pop-up menu.

•To specify a page width that depends on the width of the browser window, check

Variable Width Page. Enter a percentage value in the Width ﬁeld to indicate how

much of the browser window will be ﬁlled with the page. Enter the minimum

allowable width of the variable page in pixels in the Minimum ﬁeld.

To reposition the page width reference guide for an individual page, display

the page that contains the guide you want to reposition, then choose Page &

Page Properties. Edit the values in the Layout area of the Page Properties

dialog box, and then click OK.

To reposition the page width reference guide for all pages based on the

same master page, display the master page that contains the guide you want

to reposition, then choose Page & Master Page Properties. Edit the values

in the Layout area of the Master Page Properties dialog box to reposition

the page width guide on the master page and on all document pages based

on that master page.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Using Rulers and Guides

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 27

SPECIFYING THE RULER ORIGIN

The ruler origin is the location where the top ruler and the left ruler intersect;

it is the 0 point on both the left and top rulers. To move the ruler origin, click

where the rulers intersect in the ruler origin area in the upper left corner of the

document window and drag the intersection point to the location you want.

The ruler origin will be positioned where you release the mouse button. To

reset the ruler origin, click the ruler origin area.

∫If Page is chosen for Item Coordinates in the Measurements pane of the

Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences), you can position

the ruler origin on a document page. If Spread is chosen, you can position the

ruler origin anywhere on a spread. P

SPECIFYING ITEM COORDINATES FOR THE RULER P

The Item Coordinates option in the Measurements pane of the Preferences

dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences) lets you specify whether the

top ruler continues across multiple pages in a spread or repeats from 0 for each

page. Choose Spread to display a single, continuous ruler across the top of

pages in a spread. Choose Page to repeat the horizontal ruler from 0 for

each page in the spread.

POSITIONING RULER GUIDES

You create ruler guides by dragging them off the horizontal and vertical rulers

(View &Show Rulers). You can create ruler guides on master pages and on

individual document pages.

•To pull out horizontal ruler guides, click on the top ruler; when the gpointer

displays, drag the ruler guide into position on the page. To pull out a vertical

ruler guide, click on the left ruler and drag the ruler guide onto the page when

the Gpointer displays. If the Measurements palette is open when you drag a

ruler guide, the guide’s position is indicated in the Xfield (for vertical ruler

guides) or the Yfield (for horizontal ruler guides).

•If, as you drag out a horizontal ruler guide, you release the mouse button when

the ruler guide is positioned over the pasteboard, the ruler guide will extend

across the pasteboard and all the pages in the spread. If you release the mouse

button when the horizontal ruler guide is positioned over a document page,

the ruler guide will display only on that page.

•To reposition a ruler guide, click it, then drag it to a different location when

either the g or the G pointer displays. You must have the Item tool eselected

to click and drag a guide when the pointer is over an item and you have chosen

In Front from the Guides area in the General pane of the Preferences dialog

box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences). To click a guide when the pointer

is over an item and the Content tool Eis selected, press C(Mac OS) or

Ctrl (Windows) while you click and drag the ruler guide.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Using Rulers and Guides

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 28

•To remove a ruler guide, click it, then drag it off the page. To remove all ruler

guides from a spread’s pasteboard, scroll through the document so that a portion

of the pasteboard is displayed; press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while

you click an area of the ruler that is adjacent to the pasteboard. To remove all

ruler guides from a document page, scroll through the document so that a

portion of the page is displayed; press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows)

while you click an area of the ruler that is adjacent to the document page.

Click the horizontal ruler to delete horizontal ruler guides; click the vertical

ruler to delete vertical ruler guides.

åTo create a guide that only displays at or above the current view percentage,

press Shift while you create the guide. For example, if you press Shift and create

a guide while the document is in 400% view, that guide will display only at

views between 400% and 800% (Mac OS) or 400% and Maximum (Windows).

SPECIFYING GREEKING

In QuarkXPress, “greeking” is the process of replacing text and pictures with gray bars

and boxes to improve screen redraw speed. Greeking can also help you concentrate

on the layout without being distracted by speciﬁc words and images.

GREEKING TEXT

When text is greeked, lines of text are replaced with gray bars. To specify

greeking, choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences and click the General

pane. Check Greek Text Below and enter a value from 2 to 720 points in the

ﬁeld (characters below that point size will be greeked). Text greeking does not

affect the way characters print.

GREEKING PICTURES

When pictures are greeked, imported pictures are replaced with a gray pattern.

To specify greeking, choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences and click the

General pane. Check Greek Pictures. Greeking does not affect the way pictures

print. When Greek Pictures is checked, you can view a picture by selecting its

picture box.

Greeked pictures display as gray boxes; greeked text displays as gray bars.

Chapter 2: Layout Tools

Using Rulers and Guides

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 29

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Just as a house must be built on a foundation in order to be stable, any publication

requires a document as a foundation, and understanding the basics of a good

foundation is important.

QuarkXPress lets you create new documents from scratch, build documents based on

preconﬁgured templates, and work with previously saved documents. Documents can

be saved on a local hard drive, to a connected server, or to a removable media storage

device for transportation. Once you familiarize yourself with these basics, you’ll be

on your way to efﬁciently creating stable publications.

CREATING NEW PRINT DOCUMENTS P

You can create a new document at any time, as long as you have fewer than 25 ﬁles

open. When you create a new document, you can specify its page size and margin

positions, and you can choose whether the document will consist of single pages or

of spreads with left- and right-facing pages. You also have the option of creating

columns and text boxes on your document pages.

åParts of the user interface that are unique to print documents display only

when a print document is active. Parts of the user interface that are unique

to Web documents display only when a Web document is active.

1Choose File &New &Document (C+N on Mac OS, Ctrl+N on Windows).

Choose File &New &Document to deﬁne page information and create a new document.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Creating New Print Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 30

2To specify a standard page size, choose an option from the Size pop-up menu.

To create a custom-sized page, enter dimensions in the Width and Height ﬁelds.

åWhen specifying values in a dialog box, use the Tab key to move from the active

ﬁeld to the next ﬁeld, or press Shift+Tab to move to the previous ﬁeld.

3Choose either portrait or landscape page orientation by clicking an Orientation

icon (Mac OS) or radio button (Windows).

4To specify the position of the margin guides (nonprinting lines used to position

items on a page), enter values in the ﬁelds in the Margin Guides area.

5Check Facing Pages to specify that the document contains both left-facing

and right-facing pages.

6To specify the number of columns on document pages and the spacing

between them, enter values in the Columns and Gutter Width fields.

7Check Automatic Text Box to place an automatic text box on the ﬁrst page of

the document and on the default master page. Click OK.

∫The size of the automatic text box is determined by the values entered in

the Margin Guides area. If more than one column has been specified in the

Columns field, the automatic text box will be divided into linked columns.

If you do not check Automatic Text Box, QuarkXPress still draws guides that

reﬂect the values in the Margin Guides and Columns areas.

QuarkXPress remembers the values you enter in the New Document dialog box,

and uses them as default values the next time you create a new document.

åA master page is a nonprinting page used to automatically format other docu-

ment pages. Every QuarkXPress document contains a master page by default.

The default master page formatting is based on settings in the New Document

dialog box.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Creating New Print Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:44 AM Page 31

CREATING NEW WEB DOCUMENTS W

You can create a new Web document at any time, as long as you have fewer than 25

files open. When you create a new Web document, you can specify its page width,

its background, and its default text and link colors. Each page in a Web document

can be exported as an HTML document.

åParts of the user interface that are unique to print documents display only

when a print document is active. Parts of the user interface that are unique

to Web documents display only when a Web document is active.

CREATING A NEW WEB DOCUMENT W

To create a new Web document:

1Choose File &New &Web Document (C+Option+Shift+N on Mac OS,

Ctrl+Alt+Shift+N on Windows).

Choose File &New &Web Document to create a new Web document.

2To specify default colors for text, the page background, hyperlinks, visited

hyperlinks, and active hyperlinks, choose options from the pop-up menus

in the Colors area. You can choose an existing color or choose Other and

then select a new color.

3To specify the position of the page width guide, choose an option from the

Page Width pop-up menu or enter a value in the Page Width field.

4To make the page a variable-width page, check Variable Width Page and

then enter a percentage in the Width field and a minimum page width in

the Minimum field.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Creating New Web Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 32

åIn a variable-width page, the objects on the page will “stretch” when the end

user widens or narrows the browser window, as long as the width of the browser

window is greater than the value in the Minimum ﬁeld.

5To specify a background picture for the page, check Background Image, then

click Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) and locate the picture ﬁle. Finally,

choose an option from the Repeat pop-up menu:

•Choose Tile to continuously repeat the picture both horizontally and vertically.

•Choose Horizontally to continuously repeat the picture horizontally but

not vertically.

•Choose Vertically to continuously repeat the picture vertically but

not horizontally.

•Choose None to show the picture only once, in the upper left corner of

the browser window.

6Click OK.

SETTING UP A NEW WEB DOCUMENT W

Once you’ve created a new Web document, take a moment to set its preferences.

To set preferences for the active Web document:

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences. The Preferences dialog

box displays.

2Click General to display the General pane.

Use the General pane of the Preferences dialog box to set preferences for the active

Web document.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Creating New Web Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 33

3Enter a name in the Image Export Directory ﬁeld. When you export the Web

document as HTML, image ﬁles will be placed in a folder with this name. (If the

folder does not yet exist, it will be created.)

4Enter a ﬁle path or folder name in the Site Root Directory ﬁeld or click Select

(Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) and navigate to the folder you want. When you

export the Web document as HTML, this is where the exported ﬁles and images

(see Step 3) will be placed.

5Click OK.

OPENING DOCUMENTS

QuarkXPress lets you open any combination of 25 documents, templates, or libraries

at one time. You can open documents, libraries, and templates created in QuarkXPress

version 3.1 or later.

To open a ﬁle:

1Choose File &Open (C+O on Mac OS, Ctrl+O on Windows).

Use the Open dialog box (File menu) to locate and open QuarkXPress documents.

2Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the document you want to open;

then select the document in the list.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Creating New Web Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 34

3Mac OS only: Check Preview to display a thumbnail (reduced representation)

of the ﬁrst page of the selected document.

4Click Open.

åWhen you open a document from a previous version of QuarkXPress, the

program uses the text ﬂow from the older version to prevent text reﬂow. You

can update text flow to the current version by pressing Option (Mac OS) or

Alt (Windows) when you click Open in the Open dialog box. This way, you

can update the document to take advantage of improvements in text ﬂow in

later versions of QuarkXPress. You cannot update text ﬂow by double-clicking

a document icon to open it. (Updating text ﬂow may cause reﬂow and change

your design or layout.)

∫If the Missing Fonts alert displays when you open a document, you can click

Continue and QuarkXPress will automatically replace the fonts with a system

font. You can also click List Fonts to display a list of the missing fonts, and

have the opportunity to permanently replace them.

If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displays when you open a

document, click Keep Document Settings to use the settings saved with the

documents. Click Use XPress Preferences to update the document so that

it uses the “XPress Preferences” file on your computer; there is a chance of

reﬂow with the new settings. For information about working with preferences,

see “Understanding Nonmatching Preferences” in Chapter 1,

“Customizing QuarkXPress.”

SAVING DOCUMENTS

The Save command records changes to your documents each time you choose File

Save (

+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+S on Windows). When you choose Revert to Saved

(File menu), QuarkXPress discards the changes made since the last time you saved.

The Save as command lets you name and save a new document or create a copy of

an existing document.

To use the Save as feature:

1Choose File &Save as (C+Option+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+S on Windows).

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Opening Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 35

Use the Save as dialog box to save new documents and to save active documents under a

new name without replacing the original document ﬁle.

2Use the controls in the dialog box to specify a location for the new

document file.

3On Mac OS, enter a name for the document in the Save current document as

ﬁeld. On Windows, enter a name for the document in the File name ﬁeld.

On Mac OS, use the Save current document as ﬁeld to enter a name for the new document

ﬁle. On Windows, use the File name ﬁeld to enter a name for the new document ﬁle.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 36

4On Mac OS, choose Document P(if you are working in a print document)

or Web Document W(if you are working in a Web document) from the Type

pop-up menu. On Windows, choose Documents (*.qxd) P(if you are working

in a print document) or Web Document (*.qwd) W(if you are working in a

Web document) from the Save as type pop-up menu.

5Choose a QuarkXPress ﬁle format version from the Version pop-up menu.

6Mac OS only: Check Include Preview to create a thumbnail preview of the

document for display in the Open dialog box.

7Click Save.

∫QuarkXPress can open documents saved in version 3.1 or later. Earlier versions

of QuarkXPress are unable to open documents saved in the current version of

QuarkXPress. Items based on features exclusive to the current version will be

stripped from documents saved in older formats.

åIf you are planning to create other documents with the same speciﬁcations

(master pages, style sheets, etc.) as the current document, you might want to

save a stripped down version of the document as a template. To create tem-

plates, see “Saving Documents as Templates” later in this chapter.

If you make changes to your document but then decide you don’t want to

keep them, choosing File &Revert to Saved will open the last saved version

of the document.

SAVING DOCUMENTS AUTOMATICALLY

The Auto Save feature protects your work from power and system failures. When the

Auto Save feature is on, QuarkXPress automatically records changes made to all

documents and saves them to your document folder. Automatic saves are performed

at speciﬁc intervals (during idle time if possible). QuarkXPress does not overwrite

the original ﬁles until you choose File

Save.

USING THE AUTO SAVE FEATURE

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences and click Save in the list on the

left to display the Save pane.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 37

2Check Auto Save.

Use the Auto Save feature to protect your work from power and system failures.

3Enter an interval in the minutes field. Click OK. Automatic saves will be

performed (during idle time, if possible) at the specified interval.

∫The Auto Save feature only works with saved documents. If you have an

unnamed document that was never saved, it is not backed up by Auto Save.

åThe Revert to Saved command (File menu) reverts to the last manually saved

version of a document regardless of your Auto Save setting. If you want to

revert to the last auto-saved version of a document, press Option (Mac OS)

or Alt (Windows) while you choose File &Revert to Saved.

RECOVERING AN AUTO-SAVED DOCUMENT

To recover an auto-saved document after a system or power failure, choose

File &Open and locate the document. Two ﬁles will display in the dialog box.

On Mac OS, the original document will be saved and the auto-saved version will

be saved with “Auto Save” appended to the ﬁle name. On Windows, the original

document will be saved with the “.qxd” or “.qwd” extension and the auto-saved

version will be saved with the “.asv” extension.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Documents Automatically

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 38

Open the original document; it will be combined with the auto-saved version

as it is opened. When you open the document, an alert will display. Click OK

to continue.

The Auto Save alert lets you know that you are opening an auto-saved version of a document.

The auto-saved document retains changes made until the most recent automatic

save occurred. Depending on your auto-save interval, you may have lost a few

minutes of work. At this point, you can save the document with its auto-saved

changes (File &Save), or you can reject the auto-saved changes and return to

the last manually saved version of the document (File &Revert to Saved).

åIt is a good idea to use either the Auto Save or Auto Backup feature. However,

you should not use both features together, as this may cause a significant

increase in the amount of time it takes to save the document.

SAVING REVISIONS OF DOCUMENTS

The Auto Backup feature lets you save up to 100 revisions of a QuarkXPress docu-

ment. When Auto Backup is on, choosing File

Save sends the previous version

of the active document to a folder that you specify (or the default document folder).

A number between 1 and 100 is added to the name of the original ﬁle for each new

backup; the most recent backup has the highest number. When the number of backup

ﬁles exceeds the number of revisions you specify, the oldest revision is deleted. Revisions

may be retrieved from the speciﬁed folder or the default document folder.

USING AUTO BACKUP

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences and click Save in the list on the

left to display the Save pane.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Documents Automatically

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 39

2Check Auto Backup.

Use the Auto Backup feature to save up to 100 revisions of a document.

3In the Keep revisions field, enter the number of document revisions you

want to retain.

4In the Destination area, click the Document Folder button to save revisions in

the folder that contains the original ﬁle. To choose a different folder on Mac OS,

click the Other Folder button, then click Select to display the Backup Folder

dialog box. To choose a different folder on Windows, click the Other Folder

button; then click Browse to display the Browse for Folder dialog box.

5Use the controls in the dialog box to select a folder in which to store revisions.

Click the New button to create and name a new destination folder.

6Click Select (Mac OS) or OK (Windows) to designate the selected or new folder

as the backup folder and return to the Preferences dialog box; then click OK.

åRevisions created by using the Auto Backup feature have a revision number

appended to the document name. Because revisions are stored by default in the

same folder as the document, and the auto backup ﬁles have similar names,

locating the original document can be confusing. To prevent this confusion,

you can choose a different folder to save revisions to when you enable the

Auto Backup feature.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Revisions of Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 40

∫Each backup revision of a document you keep is a full copy of the document

in a speciﬁc state. Specifying a large number of revisions may consume hard

disk space rapidly.

RECOVERING AN AUTO BACKUP DOCUMENT

To recover an auto backup document, choose File &Open to locate and open

the ﬁle in the revisions folder. To avoid confusing the recovered ﬁle with the

original ﬁle, rename the recovered ﬁle as soon as you open it.

SAVING DOCUMENTS AS TEMPLATES

A template is a preformatted document that is protected from overwriting. You can create

templates for any publications that will use the same format repeatedly. Templates usu-

ally include style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, master

pages, and any other items that will be used in all documents based on that template.

SAVING A DOCUMENT AS A TEMPLATE

You can save any open document as a template using the Save as command

(File menu).

1Choose File &Save as (C+Option+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+S on Windows).

Use the Save as dialog box to save a document as a template

2Enter a name for the template in the Save current document as ﬁeld (Mac OS)

or File name ﬁeld (Windows).

3On Mac OS, choose Templates P(if you are working in a print document)

or Web Template W(if you are working in a Web document) from the

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Revisions of Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 41

Type pop-up menu. The Include Preview check box will be checked automat-

ically. On Windows, choose Templates (*.qxt) P(if you are working in a

print document) or Web Template (*.qwt) W(if you are working in a Web

document) from the Save as type pop-up menu. Then click Save.

åTo create a document based on a template, choose File &Open and choose the

template. Then save your ﬁle as a document.

Mac OS only: When you are saving a template in Mac OS, Include Preview is

checked by default so you can identify the template visually.

MODIFYING TEMPLATES

You can modify a template by saving it again with the Save as command

(File menu).

1Open an existing template.

2Choose File &Save as (C+Option+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+S on Windows).

3On Mac OS, choose Template Por Web Template Wfrom the Type pop-up

menu. On Windows, choose Templates (*.qxt) Por Web Templates (*.qwt) W

from the Save as type pop-up menu.

4Enter the same name as the existing template in the Save current document as

ﬁeld (Mac OS) or File name ﬁeld (Windows).

5Choose the same location in which to save the template.

6Click Save. An alert displays; click Replace (Mac OS) or Yes (Windows) to

confirm that you want to replace the existing file.

Save changes to templates by saving the changed template with the same name as the

previous document, and click Replace (Mac OS) or Yes (Windows) to replace the ﬁle.

åWhen you open a template, QuarkXPress always creates a new copy of the docu-

ment. The default name is “Document” with a number appended to it according

to the number of new documents you have opened (for example, “Document 1”

or “WebDocument1” on Mac OS or “Document1.qxd” or “Document1.qwd” on

Windows). You do not have to worry about overwriting the original template.

Even if you open a template over a network, a new copy is temporarily saved

to your hard drive.

Chapter 3: Document Basics

Saving Documents as Templates

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 42

Chapter 4: Box Basics

To create a successful page layout, you need an orderly way to arrange text and

pictures — you need boxes. Boxes are items that can contain text or pictures; they can

even be created to contain no content at all. Box boundaries give text and pictures a

speciﬁc shape, size, and placement on a page. Boxes are also vital in Web documents;

by using box tools to create Web documents, QuarkXPress frees you from the tedium of

manually writing HTML.

Once a box is on a page, QuarkXPress allows you to perform a variety of manipu-

lations, from simple operations such as resizing and rotating boxes to advanced

operations using the Bézier tools and the Merge and Split features. This wide

array of choices lets you create boxes for the perfect layout.

CREATING BOXES

QuarkXPress uses three different types of boxes: text boxes, picture boxes, and content-

less boxes (boxes with a content of None). You can enter and import text into active

text boxes, and import or paste pictures into active picture boxes. Either type of box

can contain color, shades, blends, and frames.

Create boxes using the box tools, including the pop-out tools, in the Tools palette.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Creating Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 43

CREATING BOXES

Select a box tool from the Tools palette and move the Crosshair pointer cto

any position on the page. Then click and drag, or click and create points, to

draw the box. You create boxes using the following tools:

•The Rectangle Box tools Tpcreate rectangular and square boxes

•The Rounded-corner Box tools Åxcreate boxes with rounded-corners

•The Concave-corner Box tools ıåcreate boxes with concave-corners

•The Beveled-corner Box tools Ç∫create boxes with beveled-corners

•The Oval Box tools ÎOcreate oval and circular boxes

Use the pop-out box tools to create rectangle, rounded-corner, concave-corner, beveled-

corner, and oval boxes.

•The Bézier Box tools ´∂create boxes with both curved and straight

line segments

•The Freehand Box tools Ôƒcreate freehand boxes with curved line segments

Use the Bézier and freehand box tools to create shapes like these.

åTo constrain rectangular, rounded-corner, concave-corner, and beveled-corner

boxes to shapes with equal lengths on all sides, select the appropriate box tool

and press Shift while you drag.

To constrain an oval box to a circle, select either of the oval box tools ÎO and

press Shift while you drag.

After you have selected a box tool and drawn a box, QuarkXPress automatically

selects either the Item tool eor the Content tool E. If you want to create

multiple boxes using the same tool, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows)

when selecting a box tool to keep it selected.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Creating Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 44

CREATING BÉZIER BOXES

The Bézier box tools, which are available for either text ´or picture ∂ boxes,

let you draw multisided Bézier boxes that can have both straight and curved line

segments. The freehand box tools Ôƒlet you use the mouse to draw shapes.

The design potential is limitless.

Create unusual boxes with both straight and curved line segments using a Bézier box

tool (left). Use a freehand box tool to create boxes that have a ﬂuid, drawing-pad look (right).

The Bézier Box tools ´∂create boxes with both curved and straight line

segments. To draw a Bézier box:

1Select one of the Bézier box tools from the Tools palette. Move the Crosshair

pointer cto any position on the page and click to establish the ﬁrst point.

Click to establish the ﬁrst point of a Bézier box.

2To make a straight line segment, click wherever you want the next point

positioned. Do not click and drag the mouse.

Create a straight line segment by clicking once to establish the ﬁrst point; then click at another

position to establish the second point.

3To make a curved line segment, click and drag wherever you want the next

point positioned. A point with two curve handles will display. You can control

the curve’s size and shape by dragging a curve handle.

Create a curved line segment by clicking, or clicking and dragging to establish the ﬁrst point;

then click and drag at another position to establish the next point, and a curved line segment.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Creating Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 45

4Continue creating points by clicking, or clicking and dragging.

5Close the box using one of three methods: You can double-click any time after

creating the second point; move the Crosshair pointer con top of the ﬁrst

point to display the Close Box pointer V and click; or select another tool in the

Tools palette.

åA point connects line segments and deﬁnes where line segments start and end.

Points attached to curved line segments have curve handles that you can use to

reshape the curves.

Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.

Close a Bézier box by positioning the Crosshair pointer con top of the ﬁrst point. Click when

the Close Box pointer V displays.

∫To constrain a point (in relation to the previously created point) to 45°angles,

press Shift while clicking. To constrain a curve handle to 45°angles, press Shift

anytime while dragging the curve handle.

The freehand box tools Ôƒcreate freehand boxes with curved line segments.

To draw a freehand box:

Select one of the freehand box tools from the Tools palette. Move the Crosshair

pointer c to any position on the page; then click and drag in a continuous

motion until you have drawn a freehand shape. Either close the shape manually

by connecting the Bézier line to its starting point, or release the mouse button

and QuarkXPress will automatically close the shape.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Creating Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 46

Create a freehand box by clicking and dragging in a continuous motion. This box, shown

during creation (left), after completion (center), and with an imported picture (right), was

created with the freehand picture box tool ƒ.

RESIZING BOXES

You can resize any box by modifying the size of its bounding box. A bounding box is a

nonprinting, rectangular box that encloses every box. The resizing handles demarcate

the bounding box; you can see it most clearly when Item &Edit &Shape is unchecked

for a nonrectangular box shape. You can use the Resizing pointer

to manually resize

boxes, or you can enter precise values in the width and height ﬁelds of either the Modify

dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette. You can resize active boxes using

any of the three following methods:

•The Tools palette: Select the Item tool eor the Content tool E and

move the Arrow pointer a over a selected box’s resizing handle to display

the Resizing pointer f; click and drag the handle to a new location to

reduce or enlarge the box.

Resize a circular picture box by enlarging its bounding box.

åBounding boxes have eight resizing handles.

To scale box contents as you resize, press C (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while

dragging a resizing handle. The contents will also stretch, condense, enlarge,

or shrink, depending on how you resize the box.

To resize boxes proportionally, press Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Shift (Windows)

while dragging a resizing handle. Press C+Option+Shift (Mac OS) or

Ctrl+Alt+Shift (Windows) to resize a box and scale the contents proportionally.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Creating Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 47

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows); then click the Box tab. Enter values in the Width and Height

fields to precisely change the size of a box; then click OK.

Using the Width and Height ﬁelds in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu), you

can enter numerical values to precisely resize a box.

•The Measurements palette: Enter values in the Wand Hﬁelds to change the

width and height, then press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Resize a box using the Measurements palette by entering width and height values in

the Wand Hfields.

åWhen the Item tool eis selected, double-click a box to quickly display the

Modify dialog box.

You can quickly display the Measurements palette by pressing C+Option+M

(Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+M (Windows), or by pressing F9.

RESHAPING BOXES

You can reshape any box by using the shape options in the Shape submenu (Item

menu). You can reshape any rectangular, rounded-corner, concave-corner, or beveled-

corner box by manipulating the corner radius. You can also reshape Bézier boxes by

repositioning points, curve handles, and line segments. QuarkXPress points, curve

handles, and line segments are described in detail later in this section.

RESHAPING BOXES USING THE SHAPE SUBMENU

The Shape submenu (Item menu) contains six box shapes and three line

shapes that you can apply to boxes. To change the shape of a selected box,

choose Item &Shape to display the submenu; then choose a shape from

the submenu. The selected box is reshaped automatically.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Resizing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 48

Change the shape of an active box by choosing from options in the Shape submenu

(Item menu).

åIf you convert a text box containing text into a line, it will become a text

path. If you convert a picture box containing a picture into a line, you will

lose the contents.

RESHAPING BOXES USING THE CORNER RADIUS FIELD

The Corner Radius ﬁeld lets you specify the roundness of corners on any rectan-

gular, rounded-corner, concave-corner, or beveled-corner box. You can alter

the corner radius of a selected box using:

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows); then click the Box tab. Enter a value in the Corner Radius ﬁeld

to specify the radius of the arcs that form the corners of a box.

Manipulate boxes using the Corner Radius ﬁeld (Item &Modify &Box tab). The left text box

has a Corner Radius of 0", the center text box has a Corner Radius of .25", and the right text

box has a Corner Radius of 2".

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 49

•The Measurements palette: (picture boxes only) To specify a corner radius

for a picture box, enter a value in the =field, then press Return (Mac OS)

or Enter (Windows).

Specify the roundness of a corner for any rectangular, rounded-corner, concave-corner, or

beveled-corner picture box using the = ﬁeld in the Measurements palette

∫You cannot specify a corner radius for oval, freehand, or Bézier boxes.

In a Web document, you cannot edit the corner radius for a text box unless you

check Convert to Graphic on Export in the Modify dialog box (Item &

Modify & Box tab). W

RESHAPING BÉZIER BOXES

QuarkXPress lets you reshape Bézier boxes by manipulating points, curve

handles, and line segments. The deﬁnitions on this page introduce key Bézier

concepts, and are followed by instructions on reshaping.

DEFINITIONS

Point. A point connects line segments and deﬁnes where line segments start and

end. Points connecting curved line segments have curve handles that control

the shape of the curves. QuarkXPress offers three types of points: corner,

smooth, and symmetrical.

Corner point. A corner point connects two straight lines, a straight line and a

curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. With curved lines, the corner

point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently, usually to form a

sharp transition between the two segments.

Corner points

Smooth point: A smooth point connects two curved lines to form a continuous

curve. The curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point, but

they can be distanced independently.

Smooth point

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 50

Symmetrical point: A symmetrical point connects two curved lines to form a

continuous curve. The result is similar to a smooth point, but the curve handles

always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from

the point.

Symmetrical point

Curve handles: Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control

a curve’s shape.

Curve handles

Line segments: Line segments are straight or curved line sections positioned

between two points.

Line segments

When Shape (Item &Edit) is checked and the Arrow pointer ais positioned

over an active Bézier box, various pointers display indicating whether you can

select a point ˝, the curve handles ÏÓ, or a line segment ˆ. Click and drag

using the pointers to reshape the Bézier box.

You can also manipulate Bézier boxes using the pointers together with options

in the Item menu and Measurements palette, by using keyboard commands

and modiﬁer keys, or by adding and deleting points.

Reshape Bézier boxes by manipulating points, curve handles, and line segments. This Bézier

box, created with the Bézier Picture Box tool ∂, displays a point between its two curve

handles. The curve handles are visible only when a point is active.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 51

∫A bounding box may display immediately after you draw a Bézier box, depend-

ing on whether the Shape option is checked. Checking Shape (Item &Edit &

Shape) gives you access to the points, curve handles, and line segments within

the bounding box. If Shape is unchecked, you can quickly access a Bézier box’s

shape by pressing Shift+F4 (Mac OS) or F10 (Windows).

•Reshaping Bézier boxes with pointers:

The Point pointer ˝lets you manipulate corner, smooth, and symmetrical points. To reposition

a point, click and drag.

ÏÓ

The Curve Handle pointers ÏÓlet you manipulate both curve handles. Click a point when

the Point pointer ˝displays. If the point has accessible curve handles, the curve handles will

display. To manipulate the shape of a curve, click and drag a curve handle.

The Line Segment pointer ˆlets you manipulate both straight and curved line segments.

To manipulate the shape and position of a line segment, click and drag.

Use a Curve Handle pointer Óto reshape a curve.

åTo make a sharp corner from a round curve, select a point on the curve and

Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click (Windows) one of the curve handles. To

access the retracted curve handle, move the Arrow pointer aover the point.

When a Curve Handle pointer displays, click and drag the curve handle so

that it is again visible.

Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click (Windows) a smooth curve handle to retract the handle and

create a corner.

åYou can reshape a Bézier box while you are drawing it by pressing C(Mac OS)

or Ctrl (Windows) while repositioning the points, curve handles, or line

segments; and then resume box creation.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 52

•Reshaping Bézier boxes with the Item menu:

Points: Select a point; choose Item &Point/Segment Type to display the sub-

menu; then check either Corner Point, Smooth Point, or Symmetrical Point,

depending on how you want to manipulate the active point.

Line segments: Select a line segment; choose Item & Point/Segment Type to

display the submenu; then check either Straight Segment or Curved Segment

to make the line segment straight or curved.

Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to choose either a Corner Point,

Smooth Point, or Symmetrical Point.

Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to convert a straight line segment into

a curved line segment (as shown), or vice versa.

∫Changing a straight line segment to a curved line segment will make the curve

handles accessible.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 53

åThe type of point or line segment will automatically determine the type of curve

handles available for manipulation. You cannot directly manipulate the curve

handles through the Item menu, but you can indirectly affect them depending

on the type of point and line segment that you choose. For example, if you

initially created two corner points (and thus a straight line segment), you can-

not access curve handles. However, if you select the line segment and choose

Curved Segment from the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu), or

click the curved line segment ∑ in the Measurements palette, the act of

converting the line segment will make the curve handles accessible.

•Reshaping Bézier boxes with the Measurements palette:

Points: Select a point with the Point pointer ˝; then click either †, ¥, or ®to

convert the point to a symmetrical, smooth, or corner point. Enter values in

the XP and YP ﬁelds to reposition an active point.

Curve handles: Select a point with the Point pointer ˝; if the point displays

curve handles, enter values in the rfields to reposition the angle of either

curve handle, or enter values in the and fields to resize either curve

handle (enter zero to retract the curve handle).

Line segments: Select a line segment with the Line Segment pointer ˆ; then click

either œor ∑to convert the line segment to a straight or curved line segment.

Use the Measurements palette to convert point and line segment types.

•Reshaping Bézier boxes with keyboard commands:

CHANGE IN POINT MAC OS WINDOWS

OR LINE SEGMENT COMMAND COMMAND

Corner point Option+F1 Ctrl+F1

Smooth point Option+F2 Ctrl+F2

Symmetrical point Option+F3 Ctrl+F3

Straight line segment Option+ Ctrl+

Shift+F1 Shift+F1

Curved line segment Option+ Ctrl+

Shift+F2 Shift+F2

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 54

•Reshaping Bézier boxes with modiﬁer keys:

CHANGE IN POINT MAC OS WINDOWS

OR CURVE HANDLES COMMAND COMMAND

Add point Option+click Alt+click

line segment line segment

Delete point Option+ Alt+

click point click point

Smooth to corner Control+drag Ctrl+Shift+

point (vice versa) curve handle drag curve handle

Snap point to 45°guides Shift+ Shift+

drag point drag point

Snap curve handles Shift+drag Shift+drag

to 45°guides curve handle curve handle

Retract one curve handle Option+click Alt+click

curve handle curve handle

Retract curve handles Control+Shift+ Ctrl+Shift+

click point click point

Expose curve handles Control+ Shift+ Ctrl+Shift+

drag point drag point

åTo edit points on a selected box, first use the Shape submenu (Item &

Shape &®) to convert the box to a Bézier box. The box will retain its original

shape, but it will be converted into an editable Bézier box. If you select a Bézier

box with an irregular shape and choose another shape from the Shape sub-

menu, the new box or line will approximate the size of the Bézier shape’s

bounding box.

When Bézier items are selected, their editing lines, points, and curve handles

display in the color speciﬁed for Margin Guides. To change the color, choose

Edit &Preferences &Preferences and click the Display item in the list on

the left. Click the Margin color box to access the color wheel and change the

color. The color change will affect the margin guides and Bézier editing paths

for all documents.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 55

ADDING AND DELETING POINTS

To add a point, move the pointer over a line segment. When the Line Segment

pointer ˆdisplays, Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click (Windows) to create

a new point. To delete a point, move the pointer over the point you want to

delete. When the Point pointer ˝ displays, Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click

(Windows) to delete the point.

Add and delete points to alter picture boxes, like the ones shown above. The car on the left

is the original. Several points were deleted and repositioned to make the car into a pickup

truck (center). Several points were added and repositioned to make the car into a covered

truck (right).

MOVING BOXES

You can move boxes within the same page, across page boundaries, or onto the paste-

board. You can also drag boxes to other open QuarkXPress documents or libraries. It’s

advisable to move small boxes with Item

Edit

Shape unchecked so their shape

will not be accidentally altered. You can use the Measurements palette to view box

position coordinates as you move boxes.

MOVING BOXES

You can move selected boxes by dragging them with the Item tool e, or you can

enter precise values in the Modify dialog box (Item &Modify &Box tab) or the

Measurements palette. You can move active boxes using:

•The Tools palette: With the Item tool eselected, drag a box to a new location.

Move boxes using the Item tool e.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Reshaping Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 56

åSelect a box with the Item tool eand press the mouse button until the resize

handles disappear; then start dragging. If Delayed Item Dragging (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences &Interactive pane) is set to Show Contents, the

item and items in front of or behind it will appear semitransparent as you drag;

this can help you position the item more accurately. If Delayed Item Dragging

is set to Live Refresh, the item will appear normally (opaque), and any

runaround changes caused by repositioning the item will display immediately.

To rotate a box, use the Rotation tool R, the item rotation field rin the

Measurements palette, or the Angle field in the Modify dialog box (Item

menu). To skew a box, enter a value in the Skew field of the Modify dialog

box (Item menu). For information about rotating and skewing items, see

“Rotating and Skewing Items” in Chapter 6, “Manipulating Items.”

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows); then click the Box tab. To move a box horizontally, enter a value in

the Origin Across ﬁeld. To move a box vertically, enter a value in the Origin

Down ﬁeld. Click OK.

Enter values in the Origin Across and Origin Down fields (Item &Modify &Box tab)

to move a box.

åThe Origin Across value is the position of the upper left corner of the bounding

box relative to the zero point on the horizontal ruler. The Origin Down value

is the position of the upper left corner of the bounding box relative to the zero

point on the vertical ruler.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Moving Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 57

•The Measurements palette: To move a box horizontally, enter a value in the

Xﬁeld. To move a box vertically, enter a value in the Yﬁeld, and press Return

(Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Move boxes by entering values in the Xand Ycoordinate ﬁelds of the Measurements palette.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

AUTOMATIC MAC OS WINDOWS

MOVING FEATURES COMMAND COMMAND

Nudge boxes in arrow keys arrow keys

1-point increments P

Nudge boxes in Option+ Alt+

.1-point increments Parrow keys arrow keys

Nudge boxes in arrow keys arrow keys

1-pixel increments W

åIf the Content tool Eis selected when using the arrow keys, the box contents

will move (instead of the box).

To move a box to another open QuarkXPress document, either select the box

with the Item tool eand drag it into another document, or copy and paste it.

You can snap a Bézier box to a guide according to a particular point you drag,

without reshaping the item. First, double-click a point to activate all the points

(and curve handles) on the Bézier box; then drag any point to the guide. (If the

box contains multiple, untouching shapes, triple-click to select all the points.)

FRAMING BOXES

QuarkXPress frames are decorative borders that can be placed around text or picture

boxes of any shape. Choose from predeﬁned styles, or create new mathematically

deﬁned frames using the Edit

Dashes & Stripes feature.

FRAMING BOXES

You can apply a frame to a selected box using the Frame tab (Item menu).

To apply a frame to a selected box:

1Choose Item &Frame (C+B on Mac OS, Ctrl+B on Windows).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Moving Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 58

Choose Item &Frame; or choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows),

then click the Frame tab.

2Enter a value in the Width ﬁeld or choose a width from the pop-up menu.

3Choose a frame style from the Style pop-up menu.

4In the Frame area, choose a color from the Color pop-up menu; choose a shade

from the Shade pop-up menu.

5If you have chosen a frame style with multiple stripes or dashes, you can choose

a Gap color from the Color pop-up menu; choose a Gap shade from the Shade

pop-up menu, then click OK.

Selecting a color and shade from the Gap area (Item &Frame) will color and shade the space

between a frame’s multiple stripes or dashes.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 59

∫For HTML text boxes, only the Solid and the Solid 3-D frames are available.

However, all frames are available for a raster box. To convert an HTML text

box to a raster box, choose Item &Modify and check Convert to Graphic

on Export. W

åThe Style list (Item &Frame) displays frames provided with QuarkXPress as

well as frames created using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu).

To color a frame using the Colors palette, choose View &Show Colors, or

press F12. Click the frame icon Jand choose one of the listed colors. To shade

a frame, click the pop-up menu next to the shade ﬁeld and choose a percentage

from the list, or enter a new value in the shade ﬁeld.

CREATING CUSTOM FRAME STYLES

You can create custom frame styles and apply them to text and picture boxes of

any shape. When you create a frame style with a document open, it is added to

the document’s style list. When you create a frame style when no documents are

open, it is added to the application’s style list. You can access and apply your

frame style through the Frame tab (Item menu). You can create two types of

styles: dashes (dotted or broken-line patterns) and stripes (lined patterns).

åAny dash or stripe pattern you create can be applied to lines.

You can edit any dash or stripe style in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit

menu) by selecting it in the list and choosing Edit. The Edit dialog box is the

same dialog box that you see when you create a custom dash or stripe.

CREATING CUSTOM DASHED FRAME STYLES

1Choose Edit &Dashes & Stripes.

2Click the New button to display the pop-up menu, then choose Dash.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 60

Choose Edit &Dashes & Stripes to access the New pop-up menu. Choose Dash to create a

dash pattern.

3Enter a dash name in the Name ﬁeld.

Name a new dash by entering a name in the Name field (Edit &Dashes & Stripes &

New &Dash).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 61

4Click anywhere in the ruler area. Every time you click, an arrow 3is created. The

arrow indicates where a dash will start or stop. If you create several arrows,

and space them apart at different distances, you will create a dashed style that

has dashes of varying sizes. To make a dash longer or shorter, drag an arrow. To

delete a dash, drag its arrows off the ruler, or drag the dash segment up or down.

Click and place arrows to create dashes. Five arrows were placed to create this custom dash

style (Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash).

5View the Preview area to see what your custom dash will look like. Drag the

slider to see the dash at different widths.

Drag the slider in the Preview area to view the pattern at different sizes (Edit &

Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 62

6Use the Dash Attributes area to:

•Determine whether the dash pattern is proportional to the width of the frame, or

whether it is absolute (not dependent on the width of the frame). Enter a number

in the Repeats Every ﬁeld when times width is chosen in the pop-up menu to

create a proportional dash pattern. Enter a number in the Repeats Every ﬁeld

when Points is chosen in the pop-up menu to create an absolute dash pattern

that uses points as the measuring system.

åYou can choose between a proportional and absolute dash pattern using the

Repeats Every pop-up menu menu (Edit & Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash).

Proportional segments (times width) change depending on the width of the

frame, while absolute segments (Points) remain the same width regardless of the

width of the frame.

Notice the difference between proportional (top) and absolute (bottom) in the Preview area

(Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash). Use the slider in the Preview area to see the

difference between the proportional and absolute patterns.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 63

•Choose an option from the Miter pop-up menu to indicate the corner type.

You can choose Sharp, Rounded, or Beveled.

Choose Sharp, Rounded, or Beveled in the Miter pop-up menu (left) (Edit &

Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash) to determine the corner type.

•Choose an option from the Endcap pop-up menu to determine dash shape. You

can choose from Square, Projecting Round, Projecting Square, or Round.

To apply a ﬂush, rectangular end to your dash, choose Square from the Endcap pop-up menu

(Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash).

To apply an extended, rounded end to your dash, choose Projecting Round from the Endcap

pop-up menu (Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 64

To apply an extended, rectangular end to your dash, choose Projecting Square from the

Endcap pop-up menu (Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash).

To apply a ﬂush, rounded end to your dash, choose Round from the Endcap pop-up menu

(Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash).

•Check Stretch to Corners to make the dash pattern stretch evenly along a frame

so that the corner areas look symmetrical.

When Stretch to Corners is unchecked, the dash pattern is uneven at the corner areas (left).

Checking Stretch to Corners (Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Dash) makes the dash

pattern align evenly at all corner areas (right).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 65

7Enter a value in the Position ﬁeld to precisely position a new arrow. You can

also view the Position ﬁeld for feedback in arrow placement. Click Add to add

an arrow.

8Click OK to close the Edit Dash dialog box; then click Save to save your

custom dash.

9Apply your new dash by using the Style pop-up menu in the Frame tab of the

Modify dialog box (Item &Frame).

Apply custom dashes using the Style pop-up menu in the Modify dialog box (Item &Frame).

åWhen you choose an option from the Miter pop-up menu, and then apply the

dash or stripe pattern to a line, the mitering will affect corner areas on multiple-

segment lines. If you apply the dash or stripe pattern to a frame, the mitering will

only affect the inside edges of the frame on a Bézier box. Otherwise, the Miter

setting has no effect on frames.

CREATING CUSTOM STRIPED FRAME STYLES

1Choose Edit &Dashes & Stripes.

2Click the New button to display the pop-up menu; then choose Stripe.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 66

Choose Edit &Dashes & Stripes to access the New pop-up menu. Choose Stripe to create

a pattern with a continuous stripe or series of continuous stripes.

3Enter a stripe name in the Name ﬁeld.

4Click anywhere in the ruler area. Every time you click, an arrow 8is created.

The arrow indicates where a stripe will start or stop. If you create several arrows,

and space them apart at different distances, you will create a multistriped style

that has stripes of varying sizes. To make a stripe larger or smaller, drag an arrow.

To delete a stripe, drag its arrows off the ruler or drag the stripe segment to the

left or right.

Click and place arrows to create stripes. Five arrows were placed to create this custom stripe

pattern (Edit &Dashes & Stripes &New &Stripe).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 67

5View the Preview area to see what your custom stripe will look like. Drag the

slider to view the stripe at different widths.

Drag the slider in the Preview area to view the pattern at different sizes.

6Choose an option from the Miter pop-up menu to indicate the corner type.

You can choose sharp corner, rounded corner, or beveled corner.

7Enter a value in the Position ﬁeld to precisely position a new arrow. You can

also view the Position ﬁeld for feedback in arrow placement. Click Add to add

an arrow.

8Click OK to close the Edit Stripe dialog box; then click Save to save your

custom stripe.

9Apply your new stripe using the Style pop-up menu in the Frame tab of the

Modify dialog box (Item &Frame).

åTo compare two dashes or stripes, choose Edit &Dashes & Stripes. Shift+click

to select two consecutive items, or C+click (Mac OS) or Ctrl+click (Windows)

to select two nonconsecutive items. Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to

change the Append button to Compare. Click Compare to display a summary

of each component; the differences display in bold. You can also compare two

dashes or stripes in the Description ﬁeld of the File &Append dialog box.

∫Rulers display differently depending on whether a dash or a stripe is being

edited. If you’ve chosen to edit a dash, the ruler displays along the top. If you’ve

chosen to edit a stripe, the ruler displays along the side.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Framing Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 68

COLORING BOXES

Once you have created a text or picture box, you can add a background color, shade, or

blends. You can apply colors, shades, and blends to an active box using:

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows); then click the Box tab. Choose a color from the Color pop-up menu.

Choose a percentage from the Shade pop-up menu, or enter a value in the ﬁeld.

Choose an option from the Color pop-up menu (Item &Modify) to color a box.

åYou can apply colors, shades, and blends to grouped or multiple-selected boxes

by selecting the boxes and choosing a color using either the Box tab of the

Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Colors palette (View menu).

To determine a blend pattern, choose a style other than Solid from the Style

pop-up menu. Choose an angle from the Angle pop-up menu, or enter a value

in the ﬁeld to specify the angle the at which the two colors will blend. Choose a

color from the Color pop-up menu to determine the second blend color. Choose

a percentage from the Shade pop-up menu, or enter a value in the ﬁeld; then

click OK.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Coloring Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 69

Use the Style, Angle, Color, and Shade pop-up menus in the Blend area (Item &Modify &

Box tab) to specify a blend for a box background.

Use the Style pop-up menu in the Blend area (Item &Modify &Box tab) to choose

among the Linear Blend, Mid-Linear Blend, Rectangular Blend, Diamond Blend, Circular

Blend, and Full Circular Blend styles.

∫To export a blend in a rectangular text box in a Web document, you must check

Convert to Graphic on Export in the Modify dialog box (Item &Modify &

Box tab). W

•The Colors palette: Choose View &Show Colors and click the background

icon Y. Click one of the listed colors, then choose a shade by clicking the pop-

up menu arrow next to the current shade value and choosing a percentage from

the pop-up menu, or by entering a new value in the shade ﬁeld.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Coloring Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 70

To create a blend, choose a blend style from the blend pop-up menu. Next,

click the #1 button and choose the ﬁrst color. Click the #2 button and choose

the second color. Choose a shade for each color by clicking the pop-up menu

next to the current shade value and choosing a percentage from the pop-up

menu, or by entering a value in the shade ﬁeld. Specify a blend angle by enter-

ing a value in the angle ﬁeld.

Click the #2 button to choose a second blend color from the Colors palette (View menu).

∫Box backgrounds behave differently depending on the contents and the type of

background. For example, if a text box is selected with the Content tool E,

only the ﬁrst blend color displays. However, if a picture box contains a grayscale

TIFF, JPEG, or GIF, the background color will also color the picture’s background;

if that picture box contains a blend, the color will blend in the box’s back-

ground, but the background of the TIFF itself will be a solid color.

åAn item must be selected in the document to activate the Colors palette.

You can drag and drop colors from the Colors palette by clicking one of the

color swatches in the list and dragging the color swatch over the active box.

As soon as the color swatch is positioned over a box, the box will ﬁll with the

new color. Drop the swatch to apply the color.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Coloring Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 71

MERGING AND SPLITTING BOXES

Options in the Merge and Split submenus (Item menu) let you create complex Bézier

boxes with many design capabilities. A box created with one of the Merge commands

combines multiple-selected boxes into one box shape with a single set of contents. The

Merge commands work with two or more boxes (or items) that overlap each other, and

in some cases, with nonoverlapping boxes (or items). The Split command either splits a

merged box into separate boxes, splits a complex box that contains paths within paths

into separate boxes, or splits a box that contains a border that crosses over itself (such

as a ﬁgure eight).

You can merge boxes (left) using the Union command (center) (Item &Merge &Union).

You can then import a picture into the merged box (right).

∫Two or more items — boxes, lines, or text paths — need to be selected to apply

the Merge commands in the Item menu.

When working in a document that contains multiple layers, items must reside

on the same layer before they can be merged. For information about layers, see

Chapter 15, “Layers.”

MERGING BOXES

Multiple-select the boxes you want to merge with the Item tool eor the

Content tool E. Choose Item &Merge to display the submenu. Choose

options from the submenu to combine the selected boxes in various ways.

All these commands also apply to other multiple-selected items such as

lines and text paths (but text paths may lose their content).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Merging and Splitting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 72

Use the Merge submenu (Item menu) to choose from six options that let you manipulate

multiple-selected boxes.

•The Intersection command retains any areas where items overlap the back item,

and removes the rest.

Applying the Intersection command (Item &Merge &Intersection) to stacked items retains

overlapping shapes, and deletes nonoverlapping shapes (right).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Merging and Splitting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 73

•The Union command combines all the items into one box, retaining all

overlapped areas as well as nonoverlapped areas.

Applying the Union command (Item &Merge &Union) merges all overlapping items into

one box (right).

•The Difference command deletes the front items. Any overlapping areas will be

cut out.

Applying the Difference command (Item &Merge &Difference) to overlapping items retains

the back item, and deletes the front items.

•The Reverse Difference command deletes the back item. Any overlapping areas

will be cut out.

Applying the Reverse Difference command (Item &Merge &Reverse Difference) to

overlapping items retains the front items and deletes the back item. Any overlapping areas

are cut out.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Merging and Splitting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 74

•The Exclusive Or command leaves all of the shapes intact but cuts out any areas

where there is overlap. If you want to edit the points surrounding the cut-out

area, you will notice that there are now two points at every location where two

lines originally crossed.

Use the Exclusive Or command (Item &Merge &Exclusive Or) to access and manipulate

points at any overlapping intersections.

•The Combine command is similar to the Exclusive Or command, but if you

look at the points surrounding the cut-out area, you will notice that no points

were added where two lines intersect.

Applying the Combine command (Item &Merge &Combine) to overlapping items keeps

all the shapes intact, but any overlapping areas are cut out (right).

åWhen two or more kinds of boxes or items overlap and any of the Merge

commands are applied, the style and contents of the back item are kept.

The contents of all other items are lost.

If you want to undo a merge combination, choose Edit &Undo (C+Z on

Mac OS, Ctrl+Z on Windows).

Grouped items can be merged using the commands in the Merge submenu

(Item menu).

SPLITTING BOXES

You can use the Split commands to split merged boxes that contain nonoverlap-

ping shapes, to split boxes that contain shapes within shapes, or to split boxes

that contain a border that crosses over itself (such as a ﬁgure eight). Select the

box you want to split with the Item tool eor the Content tool Eand choose

Item &Split to display the submenu. You can split boxes using:

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Merging and Splitting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 75

•The Outside Paths command works with a merged box that contains several,

nonoverlapping shapes. Outside Paths keeps all the outside path information

and divides nonoverlapping outside paths into separate boxes.

Applying the Outside Paths command (Item &Split) to a merged box that contains nonover-

lapping shapes (left) will create individual items (center). Each item can then be manipulated

independently (right).

åUsing the Outside Paths command, you can create individual boxes from

merged, nonoverlapping items (for example, a box created from the Text to Box

command). You can alter the content, specify various ﬁlls, and import different

pictures into the newly created, individual boxes.

•The All Paths command creates separate boxes out of every shape within a

complex box.

Applying the All Paths command (Item &Split) to a complex item (left) will create boxes

everywhere (center). Each box can then be manipulated separately (right).

•The Outside Paths and All Paths commands can be used when you have a box

that contains a border that crosses over itself (such as a ﬁgure eight).

Applying the Outside Paths or All Paths command (Item &Split) to an item that overlaps

itself (left) results in a separation of the overlapping junctions (right).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Merging and Splitting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 76

∫The Outside Paths command is designed to work with nonoverlapping merged

boxes; applying this command to merged boxes that overlap each other will

have no effect.

åTo undo a split operation, choose Edit &Undo (C+Z on Mac OS, Ctrl+Z

on Windows).

FILLING AND CONVERTING BOXES

You can enter and import text into text boxes, and import or paste pictures into picture

boxes. You can also convert any existing box into another type of box so that it can

hold new contents. For example, you can change a text box into a picture box, and vice

versa. A box can also be changed to have a content of None, which is useful if you

want your box to only contain color or a frame.

FILLING BOXES

•Text: To enter text, select a text box with the Content tool E. The text

insertion point iwill display and you can begin typing. To import text, use

the Get Text command (File menu). For information about importing text,

see “Importing and Exporting Text” in Chapter 8, “Text Basics.”

•Picture: To import a picture, select a picture box with the Content tool E

or the Item tool e, and use the Get Picture command (File menu). For

information about importing pictures, see “Importing Pictures” in

Chapter 11, “Pictures.”

Filling a text box with text (left), and a picture box with an imported picture (right).

åSelecting a box with the Content tool Elets you manipulate its contents.

Selecting a box with the Item tool eor the Content tool Elets you resize

the box.

For information about specifying columns for text boxes, see “Working with

Columns” in Chapter 7, “Document Layout.”

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Merging and Splitting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 77

åWindows only: Instead of using the Get Picture command to ﬁll a box, try drag-

ging the icon of a picture ﬁle from the Windows desktop or the Windows Explorer

onto a picture box in QuarkXPress. You can also drag pictures from other appli-

cations that support this drag-and-drop feature. Only picture ﬁle formats supported

by QuarkXPress or other OLE-aware applications on your system can be copied.

CONVERTING BOX TYPE

To convert a selected box to a different type, choose Picture, Text, or None from

the Content submenu (Item menu).

Choose an option from the Item &Content submenu to convert the selected box type.

åWhen you choose None from the Content submenu (Item menu), the box can

be framed, or it can be ﬁlled with a background color, shade, or blend, but you

cannot add text or a picture to it.

∫When you convert a box type, an alert displays if any contents will be lost.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Filling and Converting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 78

CONVERTING A TEXT BOX TO A TEXT PATH AND VICE VERSA

To convert a selected text box to a text path, choose a line shape from the

Item &Shape submenu. The ﬁrst line shape œautomatically converts the

text box into a diagonal text path, the second line shape ßcreates an

orthogonal text path, and the third line shape †wraps the text around

the outside of the original text box.

Converting a text box to a text path.

UNDERSTANDING SYMMETRY AND SMOOTHNESS

To draw a custom-shaped box as quickly as possible, it’s easiest to use one of the free-

hand box tools

ƒ Ô

. Unfortunately, freehand tools won’t help someone who’s hoping

to draw or trace something as smooth and symmetrical as the waves shown in Figure 1.

So how is it done?

Figure 1: Drawing a smooth, symmetrical design like this can teach you a lot.

WORKING WITH BOXES

If you’ve used other illustration programs, you may be accustomed to drawing

with open paths. In QuarkXPress, an open path is called a line. If an open path

contains text, QuarkXPress refers to it as a text path.

In QuarkXPress, a closed path is called a box. (Runaround paths and clipping

paths are also closed, but they don’t concern us here.) Although QuarkXPress

allows you to create Bézier art using lines or boxes, you may ﬁnd that working

with Bézier boxes provides a greater advantage. If you work with boxes, more

options exist for color and for special operations like merging and splitting.

Plus, boxes are generally more intuitive and easier to grab and move. Besides,

when you’re done drawing, you can always change an active Bézier box into a

Bézier line by choosing Item & Shape & †.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Filling and Converting Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 79

MINIMAL POINTS FOR MAXIMUM SMOOTHNESS

If you can’t smoothly create your design by combining ovals and rectangles

using the Merge commands (Item menu), what else can you do? To begin,

you’ll have to start drawing point-by-point using one of the Bézier box

tools ∂´. The following are a few tips that will make this process

more efficient:

1With a pencil and paper, sketch the shape you want to create.

2In your sketch, pencil in a point wherever there’s a corner. Corners are sharp

transitions. For example, the tips of the waves shown in Figure 1 are corners,

as are the points shown below in Figure 2.

Figure 2: All corners should include points.

3Look for straight lines in your drawing. Sketch a point at both ends of every

straight line.

Figure 3: A straight line should include a point at each end.

4Find places where the curve shifts direction, no matter how subtly, and sketch a

point at the middle of the “S” shape. Although it’s possible to make a Bézier “S”

shape without a point in the middle of the “S,” you have more control if you

include the point.

Figure 4: Find places where the curve shifts direction the way an “S” shifts direction in

midstroke. Then, sketch a point where that shift occurs — even if that shift is subtle.

5Use one of the Bézier box tools ∂´to begin plotting your sketched points.

Approximate the position of each point as you go. Click to create corner points;

click and drag the mouse slightly to create smooth points. Press Shift while

clicking and dragging to create a point that lies at 45-degree increments

from the previous point.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 80

Although entering points in this manner may produce poorly curved segments

at ﬁrst, you can easily go back and bend the segments after the shape is com-

pleted. You may need to add a point to some curves for sufﬁcient control (see

Figure 5). Complete the ﬁnished box by double-clicking to create the last point.

Figure 5: For smoothness, the arches in row A of this illustration should consist of one segment

only. The legs of the arches in row B bend inward at the base; they may require an additional

point for sufﬁcient control.

6Make sure Item &Edit & Shape is checked.

7Drag different parts of each segment to bend them — just as you would a piece

of wire. (Straight segments need to be changed to curved segments before you

can bend them. Click the

∑ button in the Measurements palette to change active

straight segments to curved ones.

) For added control, use the curve handles to

bend the segments.

THE FINISHED SHAPE — ALMOST

Using the eight steps just described, you should have no problem drawing a

shape that is as smooth as the one repeated in the wave design. Boxes drawn

using this procedure may require a little adjustment, but after you get the

basic idea, you’ll be able to draw equally smooth shapes without preplanning

or pencil sketching. You can then learn to incorporate keyboard commands

(listed earlier in this chapter in “Reshaping Boxes”) to manipulate points as

you go along — eliminating much of the work required for adjustment.

Figure 6 shows what the repeating shape in the wave design looks like with all

its points selected. Five corner points and two smooth points were used to

draw the shape.

Figure 6: The repeating shape used to create the design in Figure 1 is shown with all points

selected. The left and right sides of the base are designed as complementary so that a

seamless transition is created when the shape is tiled.

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 81

åPressing Shift while dragging a curve handle has a similar effect as

Shift+dragging a point. The curve handle (and possibly its partner, depending

on the type of point) is constrained to invisible guides that radiate from

the point at 45-degree increments. This can be useful when creating

symmetrical designs.

PREPARING A SHAPE TO BE TILED

Now that you have some smoothness in your drawing, how do you incorporate

symmetry? Symmetry is a matter of relying on the Duplicate command, the

Merge commands, some ﬂipping, and frequent snapping to guides. If the repeat-

ing shape in your design must ﬂow seamlessly into its duplicate, you’ll have to

make sure this shape can be tiled before you do anything else.

The wave shape in Figure 6 was prepared for tiling by snapping the bottom

four corner points to a pair of horizontal guides.

In addition, two of the curve handles were made complementary so that a

smooth curve would occur at the point where the tiled shapes are to meet. As

you can see in Figure 6, the curve handle on the lower left is angled exactly

180 degrees opposite the curve handle on the lower right. Curve handles with

an angle difference of 180 degrees combine to create a smooth curve when the

shape is tiled.

DUPLICATING

After applying color and other attributes to your shape, use the Duplicate

command (C+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+D on Windows) or the Step and Repeat

command (C+Option+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+D on Windows) to duplicate

it in the desired quantity. This provides a collection of similar shapes that

can be combined to create a single, symmetrical box.

FLIPPING

If you want a duplicated shape to mirror the original, you can ﬂip it by perform-

ing the following steps:

1Make sure Item & Edit & Shape is unchecked for the active item, so that its

rectangular bounding box displays.

2Select the value in the Wfield (if you want a horizontal flip) or the Hfield

(if you want a vertical flip) in the Measurements palette, and copy the

value to the Clipboard (C+C on Mac OS, Ctrl+C on Windows).

3Drag the left-middle or right-middle resize handle (if you want a horizontal ﬂip),

or drag the top-middle or bottom-middle resize handle (if you want a vertical

flip) until the item is reduced to the surface area of a straight line, and keep

dragging. Release the mouse button after the bounding box has been dragged

“through itself.”

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 82

4Select the appropriate measurement ﬁeld (Wor H) in the Measurements palette

and paste (C+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+V on Windows) the value you just copied. The

Bézier box is ﬂipped. If you also want the box’s contents ﬂipped, you can use the

Flip commands (Style menu) to do so at the end of the process.

Figure 7: A Bézier box can be ﬂipped by dragging its bounding box through itself.

åIf you want to delete part of a Bézier box, try using the Difference command in

the Merge submenu (Item menu). If two partially overlapped boxes are selected,

the Difference command removes the front box and cuts out the overlapping

area from the back box. For example, if you want a half-circle, draw a rectangle

over the top of an existing circle so that it overlaps the circle halfway; then select

both boxes and choose Item & Merge & Difference. A half-circle is the result.

ALIGNING AND MERGING

If you want all the duplicated boxes to behave as a single box with one set of

contents and no white space in between, you must align and merge them.

If you’ve already performed an accurate step and repeat with no ﬂipping, you

may be able to multiple-select the boxes and choose Item &Merge &Union. If

this does not work, you can use the Space/Align command to align your boxes.

Figure 8: These two shapes were tiled using the Space/Align command.

Alternatively, if your boxes are too oddly shaped for the Space/Align command

to be effective, you can use the following procedure to align boxes at a speciﬁc

Bézier point:

1Make sure Snap to Guides is checked in the View menu, and drag a horizontal

and vertical guide from the rulers of the document window to create a crossed

guide pair.

2Determine which Bézier point will serve as the juncture for aligning the boxes.

3Press C+Shift+A (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+A (Windows), or triple-click a point in

the active box to activate all its points. (Double-clicking a point will work if the

box contains only one path.)

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 83

4Determine which point will serve as the juncture, and drag it to the crossed

guide pair. All the points are selected, so the entire box now moves without

reshaping. This style of box movement lets you snap a box to guides according

to any point you drag.

5Repeat Step 4 for the duplicated item(s).

6Marquee or Shift+click to select any boxes that you want to merge into one box.

Then, choose Item &Merge &Union to merge all of them into one contin-

uous Bézier box. Repeating this procedure several times allows you to create

smooth, symmetrical boxes.

RADIAL SYMMETRY

You can create radial symmetry (like the kind shown in Figure 9) using all the

same procedures described so far.

The only additional technique you’ll need to know when creating radial symme-

try is ﬁeld math. Field math is the application’s ability to accept mathematical

operators (such as +, –, /, and *) in the ﬁelds of dialog boxes and palettes.

Figure 9: This design was created by using a ﬁeld math value of +45˚ in the box angle ﬁeld r

for each box as it was duplicated from the previous one. The boxes were then snapped to a

crossed guide pair.

When the design in Figure 9 was created, “+45” was entered after the existing

value in the box angle r ﬁeld in the Measurements palette as each box was

duplicated from the previous one. The 45 value was determined by dividing

360 by the total amount of duplicate shapes (360 ÷8 = 45).

Chapter 4: Box Basics

Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 84

Chapter 5: Line Basics

A single line can be as evocative as an entire landscape. Lines can express mood,

mark a boundary, or draw the eye to an important area. Lines are a fundamental

part of design, adding meaning and energy to your page layout.

QuarkXPress allows you to create and manipulate a variety of lines, from simple

straight lines to complex Bézier lines. You can also reshape and rotate your lines to

give your layout depth and movement.

CREATING LINES

QuarkXPress provides four line creation tools that let you draw straight, curved, and

combination lines. You can create single-segment straight lines, or you can use a Bézier

line tool to create single- or multiple-segment straight or curved lines.

Create lines using the four line tools, including the pop-out tools, in the Tools palette.

CREATING LINES

Select a line tool from the Tools palette and move the Crosshair pointer cto

any position on the page. Then, click and drag, or click and create points, to

draw a line. You create lines using the following tools:

•The Line tool œcreates straight lines at any angle.

•The Orthogonal Line tool ocreates straight horizontal or vertical lines.

•The Bézier Line tool ∞creates lines with curved and straight line segments.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Creating Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 85

•The Freehand Line tool §creates freehand lines with curved line segments.

Create straight lines using the Line tool œand the Orthogonal Line tool o; create curved lines

using the Bézier Line tool ∞and the Freehand Line tool §.

åYou can constrain a line created with the Line tool œto 0°, 45°, or 90°by

pressing Shift while you draw the line.

To keep the line tool selected, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) when

selecting the tool.

To make a straight line that ﬂows above or below speciﬁed text, see “Creating

Rules Above and Below Paragraphs” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

CREATING BÉZIER LINES

The Bézier Line tool ∞lets you draw Bézier lines that can have multiple straight

and curved line segments. The Freehand Line tool §lets you draw sketch-

like shapes that contain multiple curved line segments.

USING THE BÉZIER LINE TOOL ∞

1Select the Bézier Line tool ∞from the Tools palette. Move the Crosshair

pointer cto any position on the page; click to establish the first point.

Click to establish the ﬁrst point of a Bézier line.

2To make a straight line segment, click wherever you want to position the

next point. Do not click and drag the mouse.

Create a straight line segment by clicking once to establish the ﬁrst point; then click at

another position to establish the second point.

åA point connects line segments and deﬁnes where line segments start and end.

Points attached to curved segments have curve handles.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Creating Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 86

3To make a curved line segment, click and drag wherever you want the next

point positioned. A point with two curve handles will display. You control the

curve’s size and shape as you drag a curve handle.

Create a curved line segment by clicking or clicking and dragging to establish the first

point; then click and drag at another position to establish the next point and another

curved line segment.

åCurve handles extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.

4Continue creating points by clicking or clicking and dragging.

5You can end the line using one of two methods: You can double-click any time

after creating the ﬁrst point, or select a different tool from the Tools palette.

A completed Bézier line that contains both curved and straight line segments.

∫To constrain a point (in relation to the previously created point) to 45°angles,

press Shift before clicking. To constrain a curve handle to 45°angles, press Shift

while dragging a curve handle.

USING THE FREEHAND LINE TOOL §

Select the Freehand Line tool from the Tools palette. Move the Crosshair

pointer cto any position on the page; then click and drag in a continuous

motion until you have drawn a freehand line. Release the mouse when you

are ﬁnished drawing the line.

Create freehand lines by clicking and dragging in a continuous motion.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Creating Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 87

RESIZING LINES

You can change the length of straight lines created with either the Line

Orthogonal Line

tools, and you can scale lines created with either the Bézier

Line

∞

or Freehand Line

tools by resizing their bounding boxes.

RESIZING STRAIGHT LINES CREATED WITH THE LINE œAND

ORTHOGONAL oLINE TOOLS

You can resize active straight lines using:

•The Tools palette: Select the Item tool eor the Content tool E and move the

Arrow pointer aover a resizing handle to display the Resizing pointer f; click

and drag the handle to a new location to reduce or extend the length of the line.

Resize straight lines by dragging a resizing handle.

åIf you’ve created a line with the Line tool œ, you can lengthen or shorten it

and constrain it to its original angle by pressing Option+Shift (Mac OS) or

Alt+Shift (Windows) while dragging a resizing handle.

You can constrain a line created with the Line tool œto 0°, 45°, or 90°by

pressing Shift while you resize.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Click the Mode pop-up menu to display the four mode options

(see “Line modes for straight lines” later in this chapter). Choose Left Point,

Midpoint, or Right Point to display a Length field. Enter values in the

Length field to precisely change the length of a line, then click OK.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Resizing Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 88

Use the Length ﬁeld (Item &Modify &Line tab) to precisely resize lines.

åWhen the Item tool eis selected, double-click a line to quickly display the

Modify dialog box. If you are modifying a Bézier or freehand line, make sure

Item &Edit &Shape is unchecked before double-clicking a line; otherwise

you may inadvertently select or edit a point instead of displaying the Modify

dialog box.

•The Measurements palette: Choose either Left Point, Midpoint, or Right Point

from the pop-up menu to display the L(Length) ﬁeld. To precisely change

the length of a line, enter a value in the Lﬁeld, then press Return (Mac OS)

or Enter (Windows).

Resize a line using the Lﬁeld in the Measurements palette.

åYou can quickly display the Measurements palette by pressing C+Option+M

(Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+M (Windows), or by pressing F9.

∫If the Endpoints Mode option is active in either the Modify dialog box or the

Measurements palette, choose another option from the Mode pop-up menu

to display the L (Length)ﬁeld.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Resizing Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 89

RESIZING BÉZIER LINES

You can resize any Bézier line by modifying the size of its bounding box. A

bounding box is a nonprinting, rectangular box that encloses every curved line

when Item &Edit &Shape is unchecked. You can resize active Bézier lines in

bounding boxes using:

•The Tools palette: Select the Item tool eor the Content tool Eand move the

Arrow pointer aover a resizing handle to display the Resizing pointer f; click

and drag the resizing handle to a new location to reduce or enlarge the line.

You can resize a Bézier line by enlarging its bounding box. Bounding boxes have eight resiz-

ing handles. Four of the handles on this particular bounding box look like small white

squares because they are positioned on the black line.

åTo resize lines proportionally, press Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Alt+Shift

(Windows) while dragging a bounding box’s resizing handle.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Enter values in the Width and Height ﬁelds to precisely change

the size of a Bézier line’s bounding box. Click OK.

Using the Width and Height ﬁelds (Item &Modify &Line tab), you can enter numerical

values to precisely resize a Bézier line’s bounding box.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Resizing Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 90

•The Measurements palette: To precisely change the width and height of a Bézier

line’s bounding box, enter values in the W(Width) and H(Height) ﬁelds, then

press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

RESHAPING LINES

You can reshape any line using the shapes offered in the Shape submenu (Item menu).

You can reshape Bézier lines by repositioning points, curve handles, and line segments.

Bézier attributes are described in detail in “Reshaping Bézier Lines” later in this section.

RESHAPING LINES USING THE SHAPE SUBMENU

The Shape submenu (Item menu) contains three line shapes and six box shapes

that you can apply to lines.

To change the shape of an active line, choose Item &Shape to display

the submenu. Choose a shape from the submenu and the line will

reshape automatically.

Use the options in the Shape submenu (Item menu) to change the shape of an active line.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Resizing Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 91

∫Freehand lines can be reshaped using the techniques for reshaping Bézier lines.

åWhen you convert a line into a Bézier box by choosing Item &Shape &®,an

alert displays warning you that the line will be converted into a hollow box with

a narrow content area. The alert also provides you with instructions for convert-

ing the line into a solid box.

QuarkXPress traces the actual line width, along with any arrowhead, tail

feather, dash, or multiple-line pattern, to produce a Bézier box. However, there

is another way to convert a line into a box — by joining the line’s end-points.

Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) and then choose Item &Shape &®.

If the end-points are on top of each other, they will be joined into one point.

If they are not on top of each other, a new line segment will be added that

connects the two end-points.

To convert a straight line into a Bézier line, use the Shape submenu (Item &

Shape & †). The line will retain its original shape, but it will be converted

into an editable Bézier line.

RESHAPING BÉZIER LINES

QuarkXPress lets you reshape Bézier lines by manipulating points, curve

handles, and line segments. Key Bézier concepts are defined below.

DEFINITIONS

•Point: A point connects line segments and deﬁnes where line segments start and

end. Points attached to curved segments have curve handles. QuarkXPress offers

three types of points: corner, smooth, and symmetrical.

•Corner point: A corner point connects two straight lines, a straight line and a

curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. With curved lines, the corner

point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently, usually to form a

sharp transition between the two segments.

Corner points

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Reshaping Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 92

•Smooth point: A smooth point connects two curved lines to form a continuous

curve. The curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point, but

they can be manipulated independently.

Smooth point

•Symmetrical point: A symmetrical point connects two curved lines to form a

continuous curve. The result is similar to a smooth point, but the curve handles

always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from

the point.

Symmetrical point

•Curve handles: Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control

a curve’s shape.

Curve handles

•Line segments: Line segments are straight or curved line sections positioned

between two points.

Line segments

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Reshaping Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 93

RESHAPING BÉZIER LINES WITH POINTERS

When Shape (Item &Edit) is checked and the Arrow pointer ais positioned

over an active Bézier line, various pointers display indicating whether you can

select a point ˝, the curve handles ÏÓ, or a line segment ˆ. Click and drag

using the pointers to reshape a Bézier line.

The Point pointer ˝lets you manipulate corner, smooth, and symmetrical points. To reposition

a point, click and drag.

ÏÓ

The Curve Handle pointers ÏÓlet you manipulate both curve handles. Click a point when

the Point pointer ˝displays. If the point has accessible curve handles, the curve handles will

display. To manipulate the shape of a curve, click and drag a curve handle.

The Line Segment pointer ˆlets you manipulate both straight and curved line segments.

To manipulate the shape and position of a line segment, click and drag.

Use the Point pointer ˝to reshape an active line.

åA bounding box may display immediately after you draw a Bézier line, depend-

ing on whether the Shape option is checked. Checking Shape (Item &Edit)

gives you access to the points, curve handles, and line segments within the

bounding box. If Shape is unchecked, you can quickly access a Bézier line’s

shape by pressing Shift+F4 (Mac OS) or F10 (Windows).

You can connect line segments by positioning two end-points from two

different line segments on top of each other. Select both lines, and then

choose Item &Merge &Join Endpoints.

RESHAPING BÉZIER LINES WITH COMMANDS

You can also manipulate Bézier lines by using the pointers with options in the

Item menu and the Measurements palette, by using keyboard commands and

modiﬁer keys, or by adding and deleting points.

•Reshaping Bézier lines with the Item menu:

Points: Select a point; choose Item & Point/Segment Type to display the sub-

menu; then check either Corner Point, Smooth Point, or Symmetrical Point,

depending on how you want to manipulate the active point.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Reshaping Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 94

Line segments: Select a line segment; choose Item &Point/Segment Type to

display the submenu; then check either Straight Segment or Curved Segment

to make the line segment straight or curved.

åYou can reshape a Bézier line while you are drawing it by pressing C(Mac OS)

or Ctrl (Windows) while repositioning the points, curve handles, or line

segments. Then resume line creation.

Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to choose either a Corner, Smooth,

or Symmetrical Point.

Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to convert a straight line segment into

a curved line segment (as shown), or vice versa.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Reshaping Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 95

•Reshaping Bézier lines with the Measurements palette:

Points: Select a point with the Point pointer ˝; then click either †,¥, or ® to

convert the point to a symmetrical, smooth, or corner point. Enter values in the

XP and YP ﬁelds to reposition an active point.

Curve handles: Select a point with the Point pointer ˝; if the point displays

curve handles, enter values in the rﬁelds to reposition the angle of either curve

handle, or enter values in the „and Œﬁelds to resize either curve handle (enter

zero to retract the curve handle).

åThe type of point or line segment automatically determines the type of curve

handles available for manipulation. You cannot directly manipulate the curve

handles through the Item menu, but you can indirectly affect them depending

on the type of point and line segment that you choose.

For example, if you initially created two corner points (and thus a straight line

segment), you cannot access the curve handles. However, if you select the line

segment and choose Curved Segment from the Point/Segment Type submenu

(Item menu), or click the curved line segment ∑ in the Measurements palette,

the act of converting the line segment will make the curve handles accessible.

•Line segments: Select a line segment with the Line Segment pointer ˆ; then click

either œ or ∑ to convert the line segment to a straight or curved segment.

Use the Measurements palette to convert point and line segment types.

•Reshaping Bézier lines with keyboard commands:

CHANGE IN POINT MAC OS WINDOWS

OR LINE SEGMENT COMMAND COMMAND

Corner point Option+F1 Ctrl+F1

Smooth point Option+F2 Ctrl+F2

Symmetrical point Option+F3 Ctrl+F3

Straight line segment Option+ Ctrl+

Shift+F1 Shift+F1

Curved line segment Option+ Ctrl+

Shift+F2 Shift+F2

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Reshaping Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 96

•Reshaping Bézier lines with modiﬁer keys:

CHANGE IN POINT MAC OS WINDOWS

OR CURVE HANDLES COMMAND COMMAND

Add point Option+click Alt+click

line segment line segment

Delete point Option+click Alt+click

point point

Smooth to corner Control+drag Ctrl+Shift+drag

point (vice versa) curve handle curve handle

Snap point to 45°guides Shift+drag Shift+drag

point point

Snap curve handles Shift+drag Shift+drag

to 45°guides curve handle curve handle

Retract one curve handle Option+click Alt+click

curve handle curve handle

Retract curve handles Control+Shift+ Ctrl+Shift+click

click point point

Expose curve handles Control+Shift+ Ctrl+Shift+drag

drag point point

ADDING AND DELETING POINTS

To add a point, move the pointer over a line segment. When the Line Segment

pointer ˆdisplays, Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click (Windows) to create

a new point.

To delete a point, move the pointer over the point you want to delete. When the

Point pointer ˝displays, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to change it

to the Point Deletion pointer v. Click the point to delete it.

åTo make a sharp corner from a round curve, select a point on the curve and

Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click (Windows) one of the curve handles. To

access the retracted curve handle, move the Arrow pointer aover the point.

When a Curve Handle pointer displays, click and drag the curve handle so

that it is again visible.

Retract a curve handle to create a transition in line segments.

You can merge lines with other items by multiple-selecting the items

and combining them using the Merge commands in the Item menu. For

information about merging items, see “Merging and Splitting Boxes” in

Chapter 4, “Box Basics.”

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Reshaping Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 97

MOVING LINES

You can move lines within the same page, across page boundaries, or onto the paste-

board. You can also drag lines to other open QuarkXPress documents or libraries. The

method for moving lines differs depending on whether you are moving a straight line

or a Bézier line.

MOVING STRAIGHT LINES CREATED WITH THE LINE œAND

ORTHOGONAL oLINE TOOLS

You can move active straight lines by dragging them with the Item tool e or

the Content tool E, or you can enter precise values in the Modify dialog box

(Item &Modify) or the Measurements palette. You can move active lines using:

•The Tools palette: Select the Item tool eor the Content tool E and drag a line

to a new location.

Move straight lines using the Item tool e.

åTo move a line to another open QuarkXPress document, either select the line

with the Item tool eand drag it into another document, or copy and paste it.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Choose an option from the Mode pop-up menu, then enter values

in the Across and Down ﬁelds (modes are described below). The ﬁelds will vary

depending on the mode selected. Click OK.

•The Measurements palette: Choose an option from the Mode pop-up menu,

then enter values in the X and Yﬁelds. The ﬁelds will vary depending on the

mode selected. Press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Reposition active lines by entering values in the Xand Ycoordinate ﬁelds in the Measure-

ments palette. The ﬁelds vary depending on the option selected in the Mode pop-up menu.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Moving Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 98

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS:

AUTOMATIC MAC OS WINDOWS

MOVING FEATURES COMMAND COMMAND

Nudge lines in arrow keys arrow keys

1-point increments

Nudge lines in Option+ Alt+

.1-point increments arrow keys arrow keys

åTo anchor lines in text, just as you can anchor boxes, see “Anchoring Boxes and

Lines in Text” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

To make a straight line that ﬂows above or below speciﬁed text, see “Creating

Rules Above and Below Paragraphs” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

LINE MODES FOR STRAIGHT LINES

Before moving straight lines by entering values into ﬁelds, it is important to

understand how QuarkXPress describes lines. There are four line modes: End-

points, Left Point, Midpoint, and Right Point. Depending on the mode you

choose in either the Line tab (Item &Modify) or the Measurements palette,

line length and position will be described differently.

•The Endpoints mode: The X1 ﬁeld indicates the horizontal position of the ﬁrst

end-point; the Y1 ﬁeld indicates the vertical position of the ﬁrst end-point. The

X2 field indicates the horizontal position of the last end-point; the Y2 field

indicates the vertical position of the last end-point.

•The Left Point mode: The X1 ﬁeld indicates the horizontal position of the

leftmost end-point; the Y1 field indicates the vertical position of the left-

most end-point.

•The Midpoint mode: The XC ﬁeld indicates the horizontal position of the mid-

point of the line; the YC ﬁeld indicates the vertical position of the midpoint

of the line.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

Moving Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 99

•The Right Point mode: The X2 ﬁeld indicates the horizontal position of the

rightmost end-point; the Y2 ﬁeld indicates the vertical position of the right-

most end-point.

åWhen a straight line is in Left Point, Midpoint, or Right Point mode, you know

the precise coordinates of that point, plus the angle and length of the line.

MOVING BÉZIER LINES

It is generally advisable to move a Bézier line when its bounding box displays

(so you won’t accidentally reshape the line). Choose Item &Edit; then

uncheck Shape to display the bounding box. You can move an active

Bézier line using:

•The Tools palette: With the Item tool eselected, drag the line to a new

location. If you have the Content tool E selected, press C(Mac OS) or

Ctrl (Windows) to temporarily activate the Item tool as you drag the line

to a new location.

Use the Item tool eto move curved lines in bounding boxes.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). To reposition a line horizontally, enter a value in the Origin Across

ﬁeld and click OK. To reposition a line vertically, enter a value in the Origin

Down ﬁeld and click OK.

Enter values in the Origin Across and Origin Down ﬁelds (Item &Modify &Line tab) to

move a Bézier line.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

100

Moving Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 100

åThe Origin Across value is the position on the horizontal ruler where the left

end of the line begins. The Origin Down value is the position on the vertical

ruler where the left end of the line begins.

•The Measurements palette: To reposition a line horizontally, enter a value in

the Xﬁeld. To reposition a line vertically, enter a value in the Yﬁeld, then press

Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Move lines by entering values in the Xand Ycoordinate ﬁelds in the Measurements palette.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS:

AUTOMATIC MAC OS WINDOWS

MOVING FEATURES COMMAND COMMAND

Nudge lines in arrow keys arrow keys

1-point increments

Nudge lines in Option+ Alt+

.1-point increments arrow keys arrow keys

APPLYING LINE STYLES

You can apply styles to lines by choosing from a variety of line styles, arrowheads, widths,

colors, and shades. These options are available in the Style menu, the Modify dialog box

(Item menu), and the Measurements palette.

CHOOSING A LINE STYLE

QuarkXPress offers eleven preset line style options. You can apply line styles

to active lines using:

•The Style menu: Choose Style &Line Style to display the Line Style submenu.

Choose an option from the submenu.

Choose an option from the Style &Line Style submenu to apply a style to a selected line.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

101

Moving Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 101

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Choose an option from the Style pop-up menu, and click OK.

•The Measurements palette: Click the style pop-up menu and choose a line

style from the list.

åUsing the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu), you can create an assort-

ment of custom line styles. The line styles you create can be applied to existing

lines using the Line Style submenu (Style menu), the Line tab of the Modify

dialog box (Item menu), or the style pop-up menu in the Measurements palette.

For information about frames, see “Framing Boxes” in Chapter 4, “Box Basics.”

You can edit any existing or custom dash or stripe style — except the Solid

style — in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu). Select the style from

the list and click Edit. The Edit dialog box is the same dialog box that you use

when you create a custom dash or stripe.

CHOOSING AN ARROWHEAD

QuarkXPress lets you choose from a selection of six line end styles, including

arrowheads and tail feathers. You can apply an arrowhead to an active

line using:

•The Style menu: Choose Style &Arrowheads to display the Arrowheads

submenu. Choose an option from the submenu.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Choose an option from the Arrowheads pop-up menu, and

click OK.

•The Measurements palette: Click the arrowheads pop-up menu and choose

an arrowhead style from the list.

Choose an option from the arrowheads pop-up menu in the Measurements palette, and

its attributes will automatically affect the active line.

åYou can preset the preferences for the lines you draw by either double-clicking

a line tool in the Tools palette or using the controls in the Preferences dialog

box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences &Tools pane). You can preset Style,

Arrowheads, Width, Color, Shade, and Runaround status of lines you create;

in a print document, you can also opt to Suppress Printout of lines.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

102

Applying Line Styles

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 102

CHOOSING A WIDTH

You can specify the thickness of an active line using:

•The Style menu: Choose Style &Width to display the Width submenu.

Choose a width from the submenu, or choose Other to display the Line

Width field in the Modify dialog box. Enter a value in the Line Width

field, and click OK.

Choose Style &Width to display the Width submenu.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Choose an option from the Line Width pop-up menu, or enter

a value in the field. Click OK.

•The Measurements palette: Either click the W (Width) arrow <to choose a

width from the pop-up menu, or enter a value in the W(Width) ﬁeld; then

press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Choose a width from the Wpop-up menu in the Measurements palette, and it will automati-

cally affect the active line.

åThe printed width of a hairline rule is .125 point wide on a PostScript image-

setter. A laser printer will print a wider hairline.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

103

Applying Line Styles

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 103

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

MAC OS WINDOWS

CHANGE IN WIDTH COMMAND COMMAND

Increase 1 point C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+> Shift+>

Decrease 1 point C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+< Shift+<

Increase preset increments C+Shift+> Ctrl+Shift+>

Decrease preset increments C+Shift+< Ctrl+Shift+<

∫Line widths displayed in the Width submenu are measured in points.

åWhen you increase or decrease the width of an active line using the preset

keyboard equivalent commands C+Shift+> and C+Shift+< (Mac OS) or

Ctrl+Shift+> and Ctrl+Shift+< (Windows), the width changes to the next

larger or smaller increment in the following range: 0 (hairline), 1, 2, 4, 6, 8,

and 12 points.

CHOOSING COLORS AND SHADES FOR LINES AND GAPS

QuarkXPress lists all the colors deﬁned for a document — default colors, colors

created in the Colors dialog box (Edit menu), and spot colors imported with

EPS picture ﬁles. You can apply a color and shade to an active line using:

•The Style menu: Choose Style &Color to display the Color submenu. Choose

a color from the submenu.

Choose Style &Shade to display the Shade submenu. Choose a percentage from

the submenu, or choose Other to display the Shade ﬁeld in the Modify dialog

box. Enter a value in the Shade ﬁeld, and click OK.

Choose Style &Shade to display the Shade submenu.

Chapter 5: Line Basics

104

Applying Line Styles

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 104

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Choose a color from the Color pop-up menu, choose a shade from

the Shade pop-up menu, or enter a value in the Shade ﬁeld. If you have chosen

a line style with multiple dashes or stripes, you can choose a Gap color from

the Color pop-up menu, choose a Gap shade from the Shade pop-up menu,

or enter a value in the Shade ﬁeld. Click OK.

Selecting a color and shade from the Gap area (Item &Modify &Line tab) will color and

shade the space between a line’s multiple stripes or dashes.

•The Colors palette: Choose View &Show Colors (F12) to display the Colors

palette, then click one of the colors in the list. Click the arrow <next to the

current shade value to display a list of percent values; choose a percentage from

the list. You can also select the current shade value in the ﬁeld, enter a new

value, and press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Choose View &Show Colors to display the Colors palette.

∫You can add colors to the color list using the Colors command (Edit menu).

Chapter 5: Line Basics

105

Applying Line Styles

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 105

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

Every QuarkXPress document uses items. Items are the building blocks of page layout.

Items include boxes, lines, tables, text paths, and any combination of grouped or

multiple-selected items.

QuarkXPress items can be cut and then pasted in new locations, locked so they cannot

move, duplicated once or many times, stacked to create unusual visual effects, and

manipulated in other ways.

To manipulate speciﬁc aspects of boxes, lines, tables, or text paths, please refer to their

individual chapters.

SELECTING ITEMS

There are four kinds of items in print documents (boxes, lines, text paths, and tables)

and six kinds of items in Web documents (boxes, lines, text paths, tables, forms, and

form controls). Items can be combined into groups, and they can be multiple-selected.

To manipulate items in QuarkXPress, they must be selected. Once selected, most kinds

of items display outlines and handles for reshaping.

SELECTING ITEMS

Select either the Item tool eor the Content tool Eand move the Arrow

pointer aover an item. Click once to select a single item, Shift+click individual

items to select more than one item at a time, or draw a marquee around an area

to select the items you want.

DESELECTING ITEMS

To deselect an active item, click outside it. When the Item tool eis selected,

you can press Tab to deselect any active items.

Use the Item tool eor the Content tool Eto select an individual item, such as a box (left), or

draw a marquee to multiple items (right). Active items display darkened outlines and handles

for reshaping.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

106

Selecting Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 106

åIn general, select items with the Item tool eto manipulate the entire item,

and select items with the Content tool Eto manipulate item contents. To

select multiple items using the Content tool Eor the Item tool e, you can

Shift+click each item or draw a marquee around an area containing the items

you want. For the most part, you will want to have eselected when you are

manipulating items.

When eis selected and you choose Edit &Select All (C+A on Mac OS,

Ctrl+A on Windows), all the items on the current page or spread (and the

pasteboard area next to the current page or spread) are selected.

MOVING, RESHAPING, AND RESIZING ITEMS

With the exception of image maps, you can move, reshape, and resize items using the

ﬁelds in the Modify dialog box (Item

Modify), the ﬁelds in the Measurements

palette, or by using the Item tool e.

MOVING ITEMS

You can move items by entering values in the Origin Across and Origin Down

ﬁelds in the Modify dialog box (Item menu), by entering values in the Xand Y

fields in the Measurements palette, and by manually moving items using

the Item tool e. If you are manually moving a Bézier item, you may want to

uncheck Shape (Item &Edit) to display its bounding box. Moving a Bézier item

in its bounding box avoids accidental reshaping.

RESHAPING ITEMS

You can reshape items by choosing options from the Shape submenu

(Item menu), and in the case of Bézier items, by manipulating points,

curve handles, and straight and curved line segments. To reshape Bézier

items, make sure Shape is checked (Item &Edit).

RESIZING ITEMS

You can resize items by entering values in the Width and Height ﬁelds in the

Modify dialog box (Item menu), by entering values in the W(Width) and

H(Height) ﬁelds in the Measurements palette, and by manually resizing width

and height using the Item tool e. If you are manually resizing a Bézier item,

you may want to ﬁrst display its bounding box by unchecking Shape (Item &

Edit). Resizing a Bézier item in its bounding box avoids accidental reshaping.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

107

Selecting Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 107

åTo move, reshape, and resize boxes, see Chapter 4, “Box Basics.” To move,

reshape, and resize lines and text paths, see Chapter 5, “Line Basics.”

For information about Bézier items, see the “Creating” and “Reshaping” sections

in Chapter 4, “Box Basics,” and Chapter 5, “Line Basics.”

CUTTING, COPYING, AND PASTING ITEMS

When the Item tool

is selected, the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands (Edit menu)

are available for active boxes, lines, and text paths.

CUTTING ITEMS

Choose Edit &Cut (C+X on Mac OS, Ctrl+X on Windows) to remove active

items from the document. When items are cut using the Content tool Eon

Windows, both the item and its contents are temporarily saved to the Clipboard.

COPYING ITEMS

Choose Edit & Copy (C+C on Mac OS, Ctrl+C on Windows) to save a copy of

active items to the Clipboard. When items are copied, both the item and its

contents are temporarily saved to the Clipboard.

Use the Edit menu to cut, copy, and paste items. These commands are applicable to active

single, multiple-selected, and grouped items.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

108

Moving, Reshaping, and Resizing Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 108

∫If you Cut or Copy a text box that is part of a linked chain, the linked text will

be included on the Clipboard along with the text box.

PASTING ITEMS

Choose Edit & Paste (C+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+V on Windows) to place a copy of

the items contained on the Clipboard in the center of the document window.

Check Auto Constrain in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences), to paste items in the center of an active box.

∫If Auto Constrain is checked (Edit &Preferences &Preferences &

General pane) and a box is active, the Paste feature places pasted items in the

center of the active box. For example, if a text box is active and you paste a pic-

ture box, the picture box will be pasted within the text box and conﬁned to

the text area. This causes text to ﬂow around the picture box according to the

runaround speciﬁcations (Item &Runaround). If you attempt to paste items

into a box that is too small, QuarkXPress displays an alert.

åChoose Edit &Show Clipboard to view the Clipboard and its contents. The

Clipboard window displays text, pictures, and items that you cut or copied. The

Paste command places the current contents of the Clipboard in the document.

To anchor a box within text, use the Item tool eto select the box you want

to anchor and choose Edit &Copy (C+C on Mac OS, Ctrl+C on Windows) or

Edit &Cut (C+X on Mac OS, Ctrl+X on Windows). Then, with the Content

tool Eselected, place the Text Insertion bar Iwithin the text where you want

to anchor the box and choose Edit &Paste (C+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+V on

Windows). This causes the box to act like a character and ﬂow with the text.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

109

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 109

CLEARING AND DELETING ITEMS

You can remove items from your document completely by using the Clear (Mac OS

only) and Delete commands. With the Item tool

selected, you can remove active

items using:

•The Edit menu: Choose Edit &Clear (Mac OS) or Edit &Delete (Windows)

to remove active items (along with their contents) from the document.

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Delete (C+K on Mac OS, Ctrl+K on Windows)

to remove active items (along with their contents) from the document.

•Keyboard commands: Press Clear (Mac OS only) or Delete to remove active

items (along with their contents) from the document.

∫Cleared and deleted items are not copied to the Clipboard. When the Content

tool Eis selected on Mac OS, the Clear command removes the contents from

active items, and the Delete command deletes the items entirely. When Eis

selected on Windows, pressing Delete or using the Delete command in the Edit

menu removes the content of an active picture box or the selected text of an

active text box or text path.

åIf you clear or delete a text box that is part of a linked text chain, text in the

box is not deleted. The text either reﬂows into subsequent boxes or generates

an overflow symbol at the end of the chain, depending on the status of the

Auto Page Insertion pop-up menu (Edit &Preferences &Preferences &

General pane).

When the Item tool eis selected, and points on a Bézier item are active, you

can press Delete to delete just those points rather than the entire item.

UNDOING AND REDOING ACTIONS

The Undo command (Edit menu) reverses the last action performed on an item.

For example, if you accidentally cut a picture box, the Undo command will bring

the picture box back into the document from the Clipboard. The Redo command

(Edit menu) lets you reimplement an action you had undone. You can choose Undo

or Redo when either the Item tool

or the Content tool

is selected.

UNDOING ACTIONS

Choose Edit &Undo (C+Z on Mac OS, Ctrl+Z on Windows) to reverse the

last action performed. The menu item identiﬁes the speciﬁc action that can be

undone. For example, the Undo Item Deletion command is available in the

Edit menu after you have used the Cut command. Cannot Undo displays as

gray text when the Undo feature is unavailable.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

110

Clearing and Deleting Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 110

REDOING ACTIONS

To reimplement the action, choose Edit &Redo (C+Z on Mac OS, Ctrl+Z

on Windows) after you undo an action.

Use the Edit menu to undo or redo a previously performed action.

åYou can use the keyboard command for Undo (C+Z on Mac OS, Ctrl+Z on

Windows) to reset the values in most dialog boxes to their original values.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING ITEMS

You can lock boxes, lines, and text paths so that they cannot be inadvertently moved

from their position on the page or pasteboard. You can also unlock items when you

want to move them.

LOCKING ITEMS

Choose Item &Lock (F6) to lock active items so they cannot be moved

or resized with the Item tool e. You can still reposition and resize locked

items by entering new values in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the

Measurements palette.

åYou can move and scale pictures within a locked picture box by entering values

in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette. You can

edit text inside a locked text box or on a locked text path using the Content

tool E. You can also modify the style, size, and endcaps of a locked line or text

path using the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

111

Undoing and Redoing Actions

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 111

UNLOCKING ITEMS

Choose Item &Unlock (F6) if you no longer want active items to be locked.

Lock active items by choosing Item &Lock. When a locked item is selected with the

Item tool e, the Padlock pointer ydisplays (right), indicating that the item cannot be

manually repositioned or resized. Locked items can only be manipulated by entering

values in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or in the Measurements palette.

CONTROLLING THE STACKING ORDER OF ITEMS

When two or more items overlap, each is either positioned in front of or behind the

other item. The term “stacking order” refers to the front-to-back relationship of the

various items on a page. Stacking order can affect text ﬂow and determine the way

that items display and print.

Each item you create occupies its own level in the stacking order. Every new item you

create becomes the front item. Items can be stacked on a page or on individual layers.

STACKING ITEMS

On Mac OS, the Item menu includes two commands that let you control item

stacking order. If you press Option while choosing the Item menu, the menu

replaces the two commands with two additional stacking order commands.

On Windows, the Item menu includes four commands that let you control

item stacking order.

•Choose Item &Send to Back to move an item to the back of the page or layer.

•Choose Item &Bring to Front to move an item to the front of the page or layer.

•To move an item one level backward in the page or layer, press Option

and choose Item & Send Backward (Mac OS), or choose Item & Send

Backward (Windows).

•To move an item one level forward in the page or layer, press Option

and choose Item & Bring Forward (Mac OS), or choose Item & Bring

Forward (Windows).

Sending the front, white box one level back by using the Send Backward command (left),

results in a unique geometric pattern (right).

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

112

Locking and Unlocking Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 112

∫In a document with layers, the layers themselves are in a particular stacking

order; within each layer, each item has its own relationship to the stacking

order. When you use the Send to Back, Send Backward, Bring to Front, and

Bring Forward commands (Item menu), the stacking order of the items is

altered within the layer. The Send and Bring commands do not move items to

different layers. To rearrange the stacking order of layers or of items on layers,

see chapter 15, “Layers.”

In a Web document, form controls always reside on the bottom layer, so if

you select a form control, Send to Back, Send Backward, Bring to Front

and Bring Forward will be unavailable. W

åWhen you move a group using any of the stacking order commands, each

item in the group keeps its front-to-back relationship with every other item

in the group.

In some instances, you may want to change the position of an item in the

stacking order to create special design effects. You can use the Send to Back,

Bring to Front, Send Backward,and Bring Forward commands (Item menu)

to create drop shadows, masks, irregular shapes, and geometric patterns.

Use stacking order to create visual illusions. The two square white boxes placed in front of the

black circle create a cut-out appearance when guides are turned off (View &Hide Guides).

åTo activate an item that is hidden behind other items, select the Item tool eor

the Content tool Eand press C+Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift

(Windows) while you click repeatedly at the point where multiple items overlap.

Pressing C+Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift (Windows) while clicking

will successively activate items from the front of the stacking order to the back.

An item that is in front of a text box will cause the text to run around it, unless

its Runaround is set to None (Item menu). To change runaround, see “Running

Text Around Items” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

113

Controlling the Stacking Order of Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 113

GROUPING ITEMS

QuarkXPress lets you combine multiple items on a page or spread into a single group.

Grouping items is useful when you want to select or move several items simultaneously.

You can move, cut, copy, duplicate, and perform a number of other functions on a

group. For example, you can group all the items that compose a publication masthead;

once grouped, you can modify or move the entire group as you would a single box, line,

or text path.

After you create a group, you can still edit, resize, and reposition individual items while

maintaining the group relationship. You can also place a copy of a group into an open

QuarkXPress library for use in other documents.

GROUPING ITEMS

Items can be grouped when two or more items (lines, boxes, text paths, or other

groups) are active. To select multiple items with the Item tool eor Content

tool Eselected, either Shift+click each item or draw a marquee around the

items you want to group. Choose Item &Group (C+G on Mac OS, Ctrl+G on

Windows) to place multiple-selected items into a single group.

Group items using the Group command (Item menu). A dashed border displays around

a group.

You can group groups, and multiple-select a group (or groups) along with

individual boxes, lines, and text paths to create a larger group.

With the Item tool eselected, you can move, cut, copy, paste, duplicate, rotate,

and color a group. With the Content tool Eselected, you can manipulate

individual items as you would any ungrouped item.

To move an item within a group, press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) and select

the item with the Content tool Eor Item tool e.

åIf an active group contains the same kind of items (for example, all picture

boxes), the Modify dialog box will include a tab (or tabs) that refer speciﬁcally

to those items. If an active group contains a variety of items, the Modify dialog

box may display only a Group tab.

RESIZING GROUPED ITEMS

To resize every item in a group simultaneously, click and drag the resize handles.

If you press C+Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift (Windows) while

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

114

Grouping Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 114

resizing a group, all frame widths, line weights, pictures, and text are resized

proportionally. If you press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while resizing a

group, frame widths, pictures, and text are still resized, but not proportionally.

UNGROUPING ITEMS

Choose Item &Ungroup (C+U on Mac OS, Ctrl+U on Windows) to break the

group relationship and let individual items be active and independent.

CONSTRAINING GROUPED ITEMS

You can constrain grouped items when an active group includes a box that

completely contains and is behind all other group items. With the Item tool e

selected, choose Item &Constrain to prevent items in the group from being

resized or moved beyond the edges of the constraining box.

Constrain grouped items by grouping a series of items, including a large box in the back, and

then choosing Item &Constrain. The smaller items cannot be resized or moved beyond the

constraining box boundaries.

åWhen manipulating items within a constrained group, you can work very

quickly (with little attention to precision), because items will always align

to the edges of the constraining box.

If you prefer to work with constrained groups, check Auto Constrain (Edit &

Preferences &Preferences &General pane). The Auto Constrain feature auto-

matically makes all the boxes you draw constraining boxes, and all items within

them constrained items. If you check Auto Constrain when no documents are

open, it will become the default setting for all subsequently created documents.

UNCONSTRAINING GROUPED ITEMS

Choose Item &Unconstrain to remove the constraining relationship from the

group and free individual items from the constraining box. Unconstraining

a group does not ungroup it.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

115

Grouping Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 115

ANCHORING GROUPS P

You anchor a group the same way as you anchor an item. When you anchor a

group, it behaves like a character ﬂowing in text. To anchor a group:

1Select the Item tool e, then select the group you want to anchor.

2Choose Edit &Cut (C+X on Mac OS, Ctrl+X on Windows) or Copy (C+C on

Mac OS, Ctrl+C on Windows) to temporarily place the group on the Clipboard.

3Select the Content tool Eand place the Text Insertion bar Iwhere you want

to anchor the group.

4Choose Edit &Paste (C+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+V on Windows) to anchor the

group at the text insertion point.

5Adjust the leading of the paragraph containing the anchored group as necessary

to accommodate the anchored item (Style &Leading).

For information about anchoring items, see “Anchoring Boxes and Lines in

Text” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

DUPLICATING AND REPEATING ITEMS

QuarkXPress lets you make single or multiple copies of boxes, lines, and text paths.

Create a single copy of a selected item using the Duplicate command (Item menu).

Create multiple copies of an item and specify the distance between them using the Step

and Repeat command (Item menu). The Step and Repeat feature is useful for

laying out design elements that contain a number of evenly spaced copies of an item.

DUPLICATING ITEMS

With the Item tool eor Content tool Eselected, choose Item &Duplicate

(C+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+D on Windows) to create a copy of the item (and any

contents). Duplicates will be positioned according to the current Horizontal

Offset and Vertical Offset values in the Step and Repeat dialog box

(Item menu).

Choose Item &Duplicate to place an exact copy of an active item (and any contents) on the

current spread. The copy is offset from the original according to the values in the Horizontal

Offset and Vertical Offset ﬁelds in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item menu).

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

116

Grouping Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 116

∫The preset default offset value for the Duplicate command is .25" for both

the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset ﬁelds. You can change the default

Duplicate offset values by specifying new values in the Horizontal Offset

and Vertical Offset ﬁelds in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item menu).

DUPLICATING ITEMS MULTIPLE TIMES

Use the Step and Repeat feature to duplicate an active item multiple times,

and in any position you specify. Select the item you want to duplicate with

the Item tool eor Content tool E and:

1Choose Item &Step and Repeat (C+Option+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+D

on Windows).

2Enter a value in the Repeat Count field to specify the number of copies

you want.

Use the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item &Step and Repeat) to specify a number of

copies. After duplicating an item multiple times, the last duplicate becomes the active item.

3Enter a value in the Horizontal Offset ﬁeld to specify the duplicate’s distance

to the left or right of the active item. A negative value places copies to the left

of the original; a positive value places copies to the right of it.

4Enter a value in the Vertical Offset ﬁeld to specify the duplicate’s distance above

or below the active item. A negative value places copies above the original;

a positive value places copies below it. Click OK.

Use the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset ﬁelds (Item &Step and Repeat) to determine

the position of each copy relative to the preceding copy.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

117

Duplicating and Repeating Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 117

∫You cannot enter values in the Step and Repeat dialog box that would place an

item outside the current page’s pasteboard. You must either reduce the number

of duplicates in the Repeat Count ﬁeld, or modify the Horizontal Offset or

Vertical Offset values.

The values entered in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields

become the default values and are displayed in the dialog box the next time

you choose Step and Repeat. These values are also applied when you choose

the Duplicate command.

åYou can duplicate and repeat linked text boxes.

Copies of the items created with the Duplicate command are placed in front

of the original. When you use the Step and Repeat command, each successive

copy is placed in front of the preceding copy.

When you duplicate and repeat items within a constraining box, the hori-

zontal or vertical offset values may specify placement of a copy outside of

the constraining box. QuarkXPress will display an alert informing you that

the duplicate cannot be made using the offsets specified.

Step and Repeat offset values are measured from the origin of the preceding

box. For example, if you use the Step and Repeat feature to place copies of a

text box, the position of the ﬁrst copy is measured from the origin of the origi-

nal text box (that is, the upper left corner of a nonrotated text box); the position

of the second copy is measured from the origin of the preceding copy; the

position of the third copy is measured from the origin of the second copy, etc.

When duplicating irregularly shaped items, QuarkXPress uses the bounding box

guides to determine where to position the copies.

SPACING AND ALIGNING ITEMS

You can control the position of multiple-selected items relative to one another using

the Space/Align Items dialog box (Item

Space/Align). Items can be aligned,

spaced apart, and evenly distributed in a horizontal direction, vertical direction, or

a combination of both. To space and align items, select two or more items with the

Item tool

or Content tool

and:

1Choose Item &Space/Align (C+, on Mac OS, Ctrl+, on Windows).

2Check Horizontal and/or Vertical to specify spacing attributes. Enter values

in the Space ﬁelds to specify the amount of horizontal and/or vertical space

you want between active items. Values can be entered as precise distances,

or as percentages.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

118

Duplicating and Repeating Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 118

Use the Space/Align Items dialog box (Item &Space/Align) to provide options for spacing

multiple items horizontally and vertically.

3Check Horizontal and click Distribute Evenly to distribute the horizontal

space evenly between the left item and the right item. Check Vertical and click

Distribute Evenly to distribute the vertical space evenly between the top item

and the bottom item. The Distribute Evenly buttons are available only when

three or more items are active.

Irregularly spaced items (left) can be evenly spaced or aligned using the Space/Align

feature (right).

4Choose an option from the Between pop-up menu to specify the way items are

spaced and aligned in relation to each other.

•Horizontal: Choose Items to distribute space between items, choose Left Edges

to space and align items by their left edges, choose Centers to space and align

items by their horizontal centers, or choose Right Edges to space and align

items by their right edges.

•Vertical: Choose Items to distribute space between items, choose Top Edges

to space and align items by their top edges, choose Centers to space and align

items by their vertical centers, or choose Bottom Edges to space and align

items by their bottom edges.

Choose Centers from the Between pop-up menu to space and align items by their centers

(Item &Space/Align). Enter a value of zero in both the Horizontal and Vertical Space ﬁelds

to create an effect like the one shown above.

5Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

119

Spacing and Aligning Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 119

åQuarkXPress spaces items relative to the upper active item, which does not

move. The upper item is determined by the location of the item’s top edges.

If two or more items have the same top edges, then QuarkXPress spaces active

items from the left item.

When spacing and aligning irregularly shaped items, QuarkXPress uses the

bounding box guides to determine where to position the items.

When items overlap and Items is selected from the Between pop-up menu

(Item

Space/Align), you can enter a percentage value in the Space ﬁeld to

move the items in a negative direction. For example, if you have two items

overlapping one another by an inch, and then specify 50% in the Space ﬁeld,

the items will move –1⁄2inch.

ROTATING AND SKEWING ITEMS

Rotating an item places the item at a different angle, while skewing reshapes the item

and distorts it. You can rotate items by using the Rotation tool

or by entering precise

values in either the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette.

You can skew items in bounding boxes (which includes all boxes and any Bézier items).

ROTATING ITEMS

When you use the Rotation tool R, you can manually establish a point of rota-

tion. When you rotate an item by entering a value in either the Modify dialog

box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette, the item’s center point is the

anchored rotation point. You can rotate an active item using:

•The Item menu: Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on

Windows). Enter a value in the Angle field, and click OK.

•The Measurements palette: Enter a value in the rfield, and press Return

(Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

•The Tools palette: Select the Rotation tool Rand move the Rotation pointer :

over the item. Click to establish a rotation point; then drag in a circular motion

to rotate the item. The Arrowhead pointer ;and the item’s position will display

as you drag.

Manually rotate items using the Rotation tool R. The Rotation pointer :speciﬁes the point

around which the item rotates.

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

120

Spacing and Aligning Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 120

To rotate a straight line, choose either Left Point, Midpoint, or Right Point

from the Mode pop-up menu (Modify dialog box or Measurements palette)

to display the Angle field. To rotate a Bézier line, display its bounding box

by unchecking Shape (Item &Edit). For information about line modes, see

Chapter 5, “Line Basics.”

∫You cannot rotate a box so any part of it ends up outside the pasteboard area.

åTo view the contents of a box or text path as you rotate, select the Rotation

tool R, click the box or text path, then pause momentarily before you drag.

If you drag immediately, you will only see the box or text path outline.

Multiple-selected items behave like a group when you rotate them.

To rotate an anchored box, select the box, enter a value in the rﬁeld in the

Measurements palette, and press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows). You

cannot rotate an anchored box using the Rotation tool R.

Mac OS only: You may ﬁnd that rotating picture boxes containing large pictures

takes longer than you expect. If so, quit QuarkXPress and increase the amount

of memory allocated to QuarkXPress. If you are unfamiliar with allocating

memory, consult the documentation provided with your computer.

SKEWING ITEMS

To skew active items within bounding boxes, choose Item &Modify (C+M on

Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows); then click the Box tab. Enter a value in the Skew

ﬁeld. Positive values slant items to the right; negative values slant them to

the left. Click OK.

Enter a value in the Skew ﬁeld of the Modify dialog box (Item &Modify &Box tab) to skew

active items within bounding boxes.

∫You cannot skew straight lines, multiple-selected items, or groups. You can only

skew items in bounding boxes (which includes all boxes and any Bézier items).

Chapter 6: Manipulating Items

121

Rotating and Skewing Items

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 121

Chapter 7: Document Layout

Whether you produce one small publication or a hundred large ones, understanding

document layout controls will let you achieve more efﬁcient document production

and a smoother workﬂow.

QuarkXPress offers layout controls such as master page construction and modiﬁcation,

templates, spreads, page numbering, columns, and other automated features. These

features make it easy to quickly and accurately create professional document layouts.

THE ELEMENTS OF A WEB DOCUMENT W

For the ﬁrst time, QuarkXPress 5.0 lets you create both print documents and Web

documents. Web documents introduce some new features, such as rollovers, image

maps, meta tags, and forms. Where do you start when building a Web document?

Do you want dynamic elements in your Web documents? If you’re not sure how to

answer these questions, this section may be helpful to you.

WHAT IS AN HTML FILE?

If you’ve used the Internet, you’ve probably seen Web pages displayed in a Web

browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. What you

may not know is that the page you see in a Web browser is generated from a

text ﬁle containing a series of codes.

The technical name for such text ﬁles is HTML ﬁles. HTML stands for HyperText

Markup Language. An HTML ﬁle consists of the text that makes up a Web page,

formatting codes that indicate how that text should be formatted, and addi-

tional codes that point to graphics and other interactive elements.

For example, in HTML, you can make a word display in bold by putting a

tag before that word and a tag after it, like this:

HTML makes it easy to create bold text.

When a Web browser reads this line in an HTML ﬁle, it reads the tags and

knows to make the word “bold”appear bold on the screen, like this:

HTML makes it easy to create bold text.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

122

The Elements of a Web Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 122

This is a very simple example of an HTML tag. More complex tags are used to

set the background color of a Web page, control where text is placed, and tell

the browser to display images.

∫An HTML ﬁle is the exported version of your QuarkXPress Web document.

WHAT IS A WEB DOCUMENT?

A Web document is a special kind of QuarkXPress document that you can use to

create HTML ﬁles. But a Web document is not an HTML document, because it is

not stored in HTML format. To create an HTML version of a Web document, you

must export the Web document as HTML. To export a Web document, see

Chapter 24, “Previewing and Exporting Web Pages.”

When you use QuarkXPress to build your Web pages, you never have to see

HTML codes. You can simply design each page the way you want it to look, and

then export the page as an HTML ﬁle; QuarkXPress automatically converts the

page you design into an HTML ﬁle.

HOW IS A WEB DOCUMENT DIFFERENT FROM A PRINT DOCUMENT?

A QuarkXPress Web document works a little differently than a QuarkXPress

print document, because HTML has certain strengths and limitations that print

documents don’t have. For example, trapping doesn’t make any sense for a page

designed to be viewed on a monitor, and rollovers don’t make any sense in print

documents because you can’t “roll” your cursor over a piece of paper.

There are other differences. In a print document, you can specify exactly where

you want a text box to be placed, precisely how big it should be, and what

fonts it should use. But attaining that kind of precision is very difﬁcult in a

Web document, because HTML was designed to be ﬂexible. For example, the

concept of “page size” doesn’t really exist in a Web page, because readers can

change the size of their Web browser windows. Also, there’s no way to know

whether readers on the Web have the same fonts you have on your computer.

Even when you’re simply formatting text, there are differences between print

and Web documents. For example, print documents let you control the kerning

(spacing) between two letters with a high degree of precision, but HTML does

not support kerning, so kerning is not available in HTML text boxes. HTML text

boxes do not support some other QuarkXPress features.

Fortunately, QuarkXPress lets you create raster text boxes, which allow you

to preserve print designs in Web documents by converting them to pictures

(see below).

Chapter 7: Document Layout

123

The Elements of a Web Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 123

RASTER TEXT BOXES

A raster text box is a text box for which the Convert to Graphic on Export

box is checked (Item &Modify). When you export a Web document as HTML,

raster text boxes are exported as pictures; that means they don’tchange when

you view them in a Web browser. So, for example, if you want a particular head-

line to appear in the Stone Serif font in everyone’s Web browser, you can check

the Convert to Graphic on Export check box for the box containing that head-

line. The same is true for any box containing text that you want to appear

“as is”: text on a path, tracked or kerned text, rotated text, you name it.

So why not just export every text box as a raster text box? First, having a lot of

raster text boxes in your HTML ﬁle will increase download time, especially with

a slower connection. Users get frustrated with pages that download slowly and

may abandon yours altogether.

Second, text in HTML text boxes can be copied, pasted, viewed with a text-only

browser, searched in a Web browser, and indexed by Web search engines, but

text in raster text boxes cannot be searched, indexed, copied, or pasted as text.

Using HTML text boxes as much as possible increases the usability of your page.

Additionally, raster text boxes are exported at monitor resolution (72 dpi, or dots

per inch). Headlines look great at 72 dpi, but body text may be unreadable.

You may not want to use raster text boxes for everything. But when you

want to make sure users are seeing what you’re designing, raster text boxes

are indispensable.

HTML TEXT BOXES

HTML text boxes are created and manipulated like text boxes in a print

document, with the following differences:

•HTML text boxes must be rectangular. If you draw a nonrectangular text box,

it will be converted to a graphic when you export the Web document.

•HTML text boxes cannot be rotated.

•HTML text boxes can contain columns, but the columns will be converted to

an HTML table when the Web document is exported.

•You can dynamically resize an HTML text box and its text, but only if you resize

it proportionally. You cannot disproportionately resize an HTML text box.

•You cannot use fractional point sizes for text in an HTML text box.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

124

The Elements of a Web Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 124

•If items are placed in front of an HTML text box, and the items exceed the area

of the HTML box, the HTML text box will act as though the runaround of the

items in front were set to None, regardless of their actual runaround settings.

However, if the items placed in front of the HTML text box fall within the area

of the HTML box, the text in the HTML text box will run around the items

(assuming the items have a runaround other than None).

•You cannot link HTML text boxes across pages.

The following features are not available in HTML text boxes:

•Forced or Justiﬁed alignment

•Hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations (H&Js)

•First Line indentation

•Lock to Baseline Grid

•Tabs

•First Baseline and Inter-Paragraph Max settings

•Baseline Shift

•Kerning and tracking

•Horizontal and Vertical Scale

•Outline, Shadow, Small Caps, Superior, and Word Underline type styles

•Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical

If you want to use any of these settings in an HTML text box, choose Item &

Modify and check Convert to Graphic on Export to convert the HTML text

box to a raster box.

∫For information about HTML text boxes and raster boxes, see “HTML Text Boxes

and Raster Text Boxes”in Chapter 9, “Typography.”

HYPERLINKS

You can use hyperlinks to jump to another page, scroll to another part of the

same page, or even download a ﬁle. (Hyperlinks can also be used in print doc-

uments for navigating in an exported PDF ﬁle.)

You can create hyperlinks in QuarkXPress using the Hyperlinks palette and the

image map feature.

To create hyperlinks, see Chapter 20, “Hyperlinks,” and “Working with Image

Maps” in Chapter 21, “Interactive Web Elements.”

Chapter 7: Document Layout

125

The Elements of a Web Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 125

ROLLOVERS

A rollover is a picture in an HTML page that changes when you move the cursor

over it. Rollovers are commonly used as “buttons” that let users link to a

different page or download a file.

While visually impressive, rollovers come with some additional overhead. For

example, you might want to think twice about using a very large image as a

rollover, because large images can take a long time to download over a slow

connection (such as a modem). Also, you should be aware that rollovers are

not supported by all versions of every Web browser (although they are sup-

ported by version 3.x and later of both Microsoft Internet Explorer and

Netscape Navigator).

To work with rollovers, see “Working with Rollovers” in Chapter 21, “Interactive

Web Elements.”

IMAGE MAPS

An image map is an HTML feature that lets you link to different URLs by

clicking on different parts of a picture in a Web page.

If you use image maps, you might want to remember that not all Web browsers

display images. Even those that do display images have an option that lets users

turn pictures off for faster browsing. Therefore, if you use an image map as the

main means of navigating through your site, you might want to also supply reg-

ular textual hyperlinks for those users whose browsers aren’t set to show images.

To work with image maps, see “Working with Image Maps” in Chapter 21,

“Interactive Web Elements.”

META TAGS

Meta tags contain information about a Web page. They’re not displayed in a

Web browser, but adding meta tags to your Web documents can make it easier

for search engines to index your pages.

If you’re not sure what meta tags to use for your Web pages, you may want to

take a look at the meta tags used by Web sites similar to yours. As mentioned

above, you can view the source code for pages on the Web by choosing View &

Source in most browsers.

To work with meta tags, see “Working with Meta Tags” in Chapter 21,

“Interactive Web Elements.”

FORMS

HTML forms allow users to join mailing lists, purchase products, and send

feedback over the Internet or intranet. Forms can contain text ﬁelds, buttons,

check boxes, pop-up menus, and lists; users can use these controls to enter

text, securely submit passwords, and even upload files.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

126

The Elements of a Web Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 126

The most important thing to know about forms is that that they can’t exist

in a void; when you create a form, you must also create a server-based script

or application to processes the data submitted from that form. Such scripts

and applications often, but not always, use the CGI (Common Gateway

Interface) protocol, and may be written in languages such as Perl, C, Java,

and AppleScript. The protocols and languages you can use depend to some

extent on the Web server software and the platform it runs on.

If you would like to use HTML forms as part of your Web site, you will need

to use a third-party tool to build the server-side script or application. For

information about how to approach this task, talk to your Webmaster.

To work with forms, see Chapter 22, “Forms.”

FILES CREATED AT EXPORT

As mentioned before, a Web document doesn’t do you much good until you

export it —but what happens then?

When you export a Web document, a number of ﬁles are produced:

•An HTML ﬁle is always created. This is the ﬁle that you can open in a Web

browser and view as a Web page.

•Picture ﬁles are created for all the graphics and raster text boxes in the docu-

ment. The names of these ﬁles are the same as the names of the source pictures

wherever possible; where pictures have been pasted into picture boxes rather

than imported, default names are used. By default, pictures are exported in JPEG

format, but you can override the default settings for any one picture by selecting

it and then choosing Item &Modify &Export tab.

To export a Web document as HTML, see Chapter 24, “Previewing and

Exporting Web Pages.”

WORKING WITH MASTER PAGES

QuarkXPress lets you create and apply master pages for documents and templates. A

master page is a nonprinting page used to format document pages automatically. When

you insert a document page, it contains all the items on the master page on which it is

based. Master pages typically contain items such as headers, footers, page numbers,

and other design elements that are common to a number of document pages.

CREATING THE DEFAULT MASTER PAGE P

When you create a new document, QuarkXPress automatically creates a master

page for it. The original format of the master page and document is determined

by the settings you enter in the New Document dialog box (File &New &

Document). To create the default master page and a new print document:

Chapter 7: Document Layout

127

The Elements of a Web Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 127

1Choose File &New &Document (C+N on Mac OS, Ctrl+N on Windows).

Specify the format of the default master page and the first page of the document in the

New Document dialog box (File &New &Document).

2To specify the page size for the document and all its master pages, choose a

page size, or enter values in the Width and Height ﬁelds.

3To specify either portrait or landscape orientation, click an Orientation

icon (Mac OS) or an Orientation button (Windows). Portrait orientation is

the default.

4To specify nonprinting guides for positioning items, enter values in the

Margin Guides fields.

5To divide a document along a spine, check Facing Pages. When Facing

Pages is checked, the Left and Right fields for Margin Guides change to

Inside and Outside.

6To create dividers for columns within the Margin Guides boundaries, enter

values in the Columns and Gutter Width (space between columns) ﬁelds.

7To create an automatic text chain (which is positioned and divided according

to the values in the Margin Guides and Column Guides areas), check Auto-

matic Text Box so that text ﬂows automatically from page to page.

8Click OK.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

128

Working with Master Pages

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 128

The Document Layout palette (View &Show Document Layout) displays a document

without facing pages vertically (left), and a vertical spine between pages in a document with

facing pages (right). To create a document with facing pages, check Facing Pages in the

New Document dialog box.

åMaster items that are commonly included in master pages are headers, footers,

sidebars, page numbers, and pictures (such as corporate logos or artwork) that

appear throughout the document.

CREATING THE DEFAULT MASTER PAGE W

When you create a new document, QuarkXPress automatically creates a

master page for it. The original format of the master page and document is

determined by the settings you enter in the New Web Document dialog

box (File &New &Web Document). To create the default master page

and a new Web document:

1Choose File &New &Web Document (C+Option+Shift+N on Mac OS,

Ctrl+Alt+Shift+N on Windows).

Specify the format of the default master page and the ﬁrst page of the document in the

New Web Document dialog box (File &New &Web Document).

Chapter 7: Document Layout

129

Working with Master Pages

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 129

2To specify default colors for text, the page background, hyperlinks, visited

hyperlinks, and active hyperlinks, choose options from the pop-up menus in

the Colors area. You can choose an existing color or choose Other and then

select a new color.

3To specify the position of the page width reference guide, choose an option

from the Page Width pop-up menu or enter a value in the Page Width ﬁeld.

4To make the page a variable width page, check Variable Width Page and then

enter a percentage in the Width ﬁeld and a minimum page width, in pixels,

in the Minimum ﬁeld.

åIn a variable width page, variable width text boxes will “stretch” when the

reader widens or narrows the browser window, as long as the width of the

browser window is greater than the value in the Minimum ﬁeld. (To make a

variable width text box, select a text box and choose Item &Modify. In the

Text tab, check Make Variable Width.)

5To specify a background picture for the page, check Background Image, then

click Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) and locate the picture ﬁle. Finally,

choose an option from the Repeat pop-up menu:

•Choose Tile to continually repeat the graphic both horizontally and vertically.

•Choose Horizontal to continually repeat the graphic horizontally, but

not vertically.

•Choose Vertical to continually repeat the graphic vertically, but not horizontally.

•Choose None to display the graphic only once, in the upper left corner of

the browser window.

6Click OK.

åMaster items that are commonly included in master pages are headers, footers,

sidebars, page numbers, and pictures (such as corporate logos or artwork) that

appear throughout the document.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

130

Working with Master Pages

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 130

CREATING NEW MASTER PAGES P

The Document Layout palette (View &Show Document Layout) lets you

create up to 127 master pages. The icons along the top of the palette let you

create, duplicate, and delete master and document pages in the lower two

sections. To create a new master page:

1Click either the blank nonfacing page 0or blank facing-page ! icon in the

top is linked to the text box below.

3Click the text box you want to be second in the chain. After you do this, the

second text box is linked and the Linking tool is automatically deselected.

åTo cut, copy, or paste all the boxes containing a story, select all the boxes at

once. To multiple-select text boxes, press Shift while clicking on the boxes with

the Item tool e.

If you press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) when you select the Linking

tool u, you can add more than one text box to a chain without having to

reselect the Linking tool uafter each link. When you have ﬁnished adding

boxes to a text chain, deselect the Linking tool uby selecting another tool.

BREAKING TEXT BOX LINKS

To break links between text boxes:

1Select the Unlinking tool U.

2Click a text box that is part of a text chain to display the arrow(s) that

indicate links.

3Click the Unlinking pointer ?on an arrow’s head or tail feathers.

∫To remove a text box from a text chain of three or more text boxes, and reroute

the links around it, select the Unlinking tool U and press Shift while clicking

the box.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

154

Working with Text Chains

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 154

CREATING “CONTINUED” REFERENCES P

In newspapers and magazines, you often see “continued on” and “continued from”

references where a story jumps from one page to another. These are called jump lines.

QuarkXPress can automatically place the correct page number with the “continued

on” and “continued from” text in jump lines. When creating a “continued” reference,

you need at least two text boxes for each section of the story. One box will contain

the story, and the other box will contain the reference text. The reference text can be

formatted in any fashion, and can have any wording.

1Create two or more linked text boxes to contain the story.

2Create smaller text boxes to contain “continued on page” and “continued from

page” references. Enter the wording you prefer and apply styles to the text.

3Select the Item tool e; place these boxes within the story text boxes where the

references should go. For example, place the “continued on page” at the bottom

of the ﬁrst text box and “continued from page” at the top of the next text box.

The boxes containing “continued on” and “continued from” must touch the

text boxes containing the stories. You can also anchor the “continued on” and

“continued from” text boxes if you prefer. To anchor a text box, see “Anchoring

Boxes and Lines in Text” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

Use a combination of overlapping text boxes and keyboard commands to create “continued

on page” and “continued from page” references that update automatically.

4After the “continued on page” reference, enter the Next Box Page Number

character by pressing C+4 on Mac OS or Ctrl+4 on Windows. The Next Box

Page Number character displays the page number of the next linked box.

5After the “continued from page” reference, enter the Previous Box Page Number

character by pressing C+2 on Mac OS or Ctrl+2 on Windows. The Previous Box

Page Number character displays the page number of the previous linked box.

6Move each pair of text boxes to separate pages; the page numbers in the

“continued” references will automatically update.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

155

Creating “Continued” References

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 155

∫<None> is displayed instead of the page number under the following condi-

tions: (1) If a text box that contains the Previous Box Page Number character or

the Next Box Page Number character does not touch the text box with the

story, or (2) If a text box that contains the Previous Box Page Number character

or the Next Box Page Number character does not touch a linked text box.

åWhen “continued on” and “continued from” references are contained in

separate text boxes (grouped within other linked text boxes), editing the

text in a story won’t cause the “continued” references to reﬂow.

If a story jumps to different pages more than once, you can create a chain of

“continued” references. For example, if your story starts on page 1, is contin-

ued to page 17, and ends on page 18, you’ll need two “continued on” and

“continued from” references. To create the additional “continued” references,

follow the same steps used to create the initial references.

Grouping the “continued on” and “continued from” boxes with their respective

stories may make it easier to move each pair of boxes as a unit. To group the

boxes, select the desired boxes and choose Item &Group (C+G on Mac OS,

Ctrl+G on Windows). Grouped boxes remain together when moved to a differ-

ent location in the document.

WORKING WITH COLUMNS

Columns are vertical divisions of a text box in QuarkXPress. You can place columns

in a new or existing document. You can also adjust the size of columns and the width

between them (the gutter width). Columns are used to divide text boxes for easier

reading, as in a magazine or newspaper article.

CREATING COLUMNS FOR NEW DOCUMENTS P

When you create a new print document and specify the number of columns,

that speciﬁcation applies to both the default master page and the document

pages based on that master page. To specify the number of columns on the

default master page and the ﬁrst page of a new document:

1Choose File &New &Document (C+N on Mac OS, Ctrl+N on Windows).

2Enter a value in the Columns ﬁeld.

3Enter a value in the Gutter Width ﬁeld to specify the space between columns.

4Check Automatic Text Box to create an automatic text box with the speciﬁed

number of columns on the document page.

5Click OK.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

156

Creating “Continued” References

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 156

åSpecify the number of columns on your page in the Column Guides area of the

New Document dialog box (File menu). If you check Automatic Text Box, the

box will be divided into the speciﬁed columns. If you do not check Automatic

Text Box, the page will only show the column guides. The default color for the

column guides is blue.

EDITING COLUMNS IN EXISTING DOCUMENTS P

You can make global changes to Column Guides in existing documents by

editing the Master Guides for any master page. If you change the columns for

an automatic text box that contains text, the text is reﬂowed automatically. For

information about reﬂow, see “Modifying Master Guides” in the “Formatting

and Applying Master Pages” section earlier in this chapter.

DIVIDING A TEXT BOX INTO COLUMNS

You can change the number of columns in any text box at any time.

∫An HTML text box with multiple columns will be converted to an HTML table

at export.

1Select the text box you want to modify.

2Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows); then click

the Text tab.

Modify the columns in a text box using the Text tab in the Modify dialog box (Item &

Modify &Text tab).

3Enter a new value in the Columns ﬁeld.

4To modify the amount of space between columns, enter a value in the Gutter

Width ﬁeld.

5Click OK. Any text in the box will reﬂow automatically into the new columns.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

157

Working with Columns

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 157

åTo force text to ﬂow into the next column, enter the Next Column character 3

by pressing Enter (Mac OS) or Keypad Enter (Windows). To force text to ﬂow

into the next text box, skipping any columns in between, enter the Next Box

character b by pressing Shift+Enter (Mac OS) or Shift+Keypad Enter (Windows).

Changing a single-column text box (left) to a multiple-column text box (right) causes the text

to reﬂow automatically.

åYou can also divide any selected text box on a master page into columns using

the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Cols field in the

Measurements palette.

COPYING ITEMS AND PAGES BETWEEN DOCUMENTS

In QuarkXPress, you can copy items and entire pages between documents by dragging

them. This is useful if you have similar information in two different documents. To

copy items between documents, you simply position two document windows on-screen

and drag items from one to the other. To copy pages between print documents, you must

be in Thumbnails view. The document you are dragging pages from is referred to as

the “source document”; the document you are dragging pages to is referred to as the

“target document.”

COPYING ITEMS BETWEEN DOCUMENTS

You can drag any selected items between documents, as long as they ﬁt within

the target document’s page size and pasteboard.

1Arrange the documents on-screen so part of each document is showing. The

documents can be displayed in any view except Thumbnails.

2Display the pages containing the items and the pages that the items will be

moved to.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

158

Working with Columns

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 158

3Select the items to be moved from the source document. Select the Item tool e

and click an item. Or, select the Item tool eor the Content tool Eand press

Shift while clicking multiple items.

4Drag the items from the source document to the target document. Position the

items in the target document. The items should now appear in both documents.

åCopying items between documents is useful when you occasionally need to

re-use an item. However, if you need to use an item often, it may be more con-

venient to store it in a library. To create libraries, see Chapter 16, “Libraries.”

DRAGGING THUMBNAILS

To drag pages between documents, both documents must be open. The target

document must have the same page size, or a larger page size, than the source

document. If the pages you want to drag are facing pages, the target document

must have facing pages. If the source document is a document without facing

pages, the target document should not have facing pages either. To drag

thumbnails between documents:

1On Mac OS, press Option while choosing View &Windows &Tile Docu-

ments. This automatically arranges the documents on-screen and displays

them in Thumbnails views.

On Windows, Choose Window & Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically so

that both document windows are visible, then display each document as

Thumbnails (View &Thumbnails).

2Select any tool and click the pages you want to move in the source document.

To move a range of pages, click the ﬁrst page then press Shift while you click the

last page you want to move. To move nonsequential pages, press C(Mac OS) or

Ctrl (Windows) while clicking to select individual pages.

3Drag the thumbnails to the target document. When you drag a thumbnail page

to a different location, the pointer indicates where the page will be inserted and

the way in which adjoining pages will be affected.

•A page icon pointer (4, 1, or 2) indicates that inserting the page at that loca-

tion will not affect existing document pages. The Force Left pointer -indicates

that the existing pages in the spread will be forced to the left. The Force Right

pointer _ indicates that existing pages in the spread will be forced to the right.

•To move a thumbnail page between two spreads, drag the thumbnail and release

the mouse button when the Force Down +pointer displays. Spreads that follow

the inserted pages are forced down.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

159

Copying Items and Pages Between Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 159

4When you’re ﬁnished moving pages, return the document to a percentage view.

You cannot edit pages in Thumbnails view. If you need to edit pages in a

reduced view, change the view percentage to a small size such as 10% or 20%.

5If you dragged thumbnails to recover pages in a damaged document, delete the

blank page that was the original page 1 of the target document (Page &Delete).

This page is no longer needed.

∫When you drag-copy pages between documents in Thumbnails view, subsequent

pages in the target document are repositioned and renumbered accordingly.

If you drag a page that has linked text boxes, all the text of the story will be

added to the new document. The Text Overﬂow symbol twill display to show

that this has occurred.

AFFECTING DOCUMENT DEFAULT SETTINGS AND PREFERENCES

When you drag items and pages between documents, certain default settings

and preferences are affected as follows:

•Any style sheets, colors, dashes and stripes, lists, or hyphenation and justiﬁ-

cation speciﬁcations used in any items in the source document are added to

the target document.

If any of the source document’s speciﬁcations have the same name as a speciﬁ-

cation in the target document, the target document speciﬁcation is used. (For

example, if a color has the same name but is deﬁned differently, the item

will change color from the source document to the target document.)

•If the “XPress Preferences” ﬁle used in the source document is different from

the ﬁle used in the target document, text reﬂow may occur.

•When you drag pages between documents, any master pages used on pages in

the source document are added to the target document. If any of the source

document’s master pages have the same name as a master page in the target

document, the master pages from the source document are automatically

renamed. If a master page in the source document is identical in layout to a

master page in the target document, the master page in the target document

is used for any source pages based on the identical source master page.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

160

Copying Items and Pages Between Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 160

DRAGGING DOCUMENTS THAT CONTAIN MULTIPLE LAYERS

If you drag a document that contains multiple layers:

•Items on the Default layer of the source document are placed on the Default

layer of the target document. These items are placed in front of all items

currently residing in the target document’s Default layer.

•All other layers move to the top of the Layers palette list in the target document.

•If the target document contains the same layer name as the source document,

the copied layer has an * (asterisk) symbol placed in front of its name in the

target document’s Layers palette.

•The thumbnail drag functions the same way even when the Layers palette

is hidden.

Duplicate layer names (shown with an asterisk) that were copied from a source document to

a target document.

åIf an item is dragged from one document to another, the item, as well as the

layer it resides in, is copied to the target document.

Chapter 7: Document Layout

161

Copying Items and Pages Between Documents

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 161

Chapter 8: Text Basics

Text is an integral part of nearly every publication. Because each publication requires

different text-handling strategies, QuarkXPress lets you create and edit text directly in

your publications or import text from most popular word processing applications.

In addition to the standard text formatting and editing features, QuarkXPress includes

such features as ﬁnding and changing text or attributes, spell checking, custom spelling

dictionaries, and a font usage utility for making document-wide changes to text.

EDITING TEXT

Using the word processing capabilities built into QuarkXPress, you can create text

for your publications without using another application. If you prefer to generate text

using a word processing application, you can import the text into a QuarkXPress doc-

ument. Regardless of which way you create text, you can use QuarkXPress to edit all

the text in your publications quickly and efﬁciently.

USING TOOLS

In QuarkXPress, you enter and import text into active text boxes or text paths

using the Content tool E. Characters are entered at the text insertion point,

indicated by the blinking icon i.

•To enter text into a text box or text path, select the Content tool E. Click the

text box or text path to activate it. The blinking text insertion point iindicates

where text you enter or import is placed.

•To move the text insertion point i, click the mouse when the Text Insertion

bar Iis at the desired location. You can establish a new text insertion point i

only within text or at the beginning or end of a paragraph; you cannot move

the text insertion point ito another location beyond the last text in the story

or path.

•To select text using the mouse, click the mouse when the Text Insertion bar I

is at the desired location, then drag to select the text you want and release the

mouse button. When a range of text is selected, characters you enter or import

replace the selected range.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

162

Editing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 162

åWhen the Content tool Eis selected, the Arrow pointer achanges to the Text

Insertion bar Iwhen positioned over an active text box.

Editing text requires moving the text insertion point iwithin a text box. You

can either move the Text Insertion bar Iand click to place the text insertion

point iwhere you want it, or you can use keyboard commands. The keyboard

commands are explained later in this section.

You can select text using multiple mouse clicks. A double-click selects the word

containing the text insertion point i; a triple-click selects the line containing the

text insertion point i; four clicks selects the entire paragraph containing the text

insertion point i; ﬁve clicks selects the entire story.

COPYING, CUTTING, AND PASTING

Copying, cutting, and pasting text is useful for moving text around in a

document. To copy, cut, or paste text:

1Select the Content tool E. Select the text you want, then choose Edit &Copy

(C+C on Mac OS, Ctrl+C on Windows) or Cut (C+X on Mac OS, Ctrl+X on

Windows). The text will be placed on the Clipboard.

2To paste text from the Clipboard into your document, select the Content

tool E. Place the text insertion point iwhere you want the pasted text to

begin. Choose Edit &Paste (C+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+V on Windows).

åWhen you cut or copy text, it is stored on the Clipboard until you replace it

by cutting or copying another text range or item, or until you shut down

your computer.

åTo delete the character before the text insertion point i, press Delete (Mac OS)

or Backspace (Windows). To delete the character following the text insertion

point i, press Shift+Delete (Mac OS) or Delete (Windows). To delete a selected

range of text, press Delete (Mac OS) or Backspace (Windows).

To cut, copy, replace, or delete text, you must ﬁrst select it. You can select text

with the mouse or by using keyboard commands. The keyboard commands are

explained later in this section.

When you double-click to select a word and cut or copy it, QuarkXPress

looks at the context of the word and adds or deletes a space automatically as

needed when you paste the word in its new location. This behavior is referred

to as Smart Space. If you want an accompanying punctuation mark included

with the word you’re selecting, double-click between the word and its

adjacent punctuation.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

163

Editing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 163

EDITING WITH DRAG AND DROP TEXT

The Drag and Drop Text feature lets you select text and move it with the

mouse. You can drag and drop text only within a text chain, not between

unlinked text boxes. To drag and drop text:

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences; then click Interactive in the list

on the left to display the Interactive pane. Check the Drag and Drop Text

check box. Click OK.

2Select the text you want to move or copy.

3To move selected text, click within the selected range, drag the pointer to a new

location, and release the mouse to drop the text into place.

4To copy and move selected text, press Shift while clicking within the selected

range, drag the pointer to a new location, and release the mouse to drop the

copied text.

åMac OS only: The Drag and Drop Text feature can be enabled temporarily, even

with the preference unchecked. To move selected text, press C+Control while

you drag and drop. To copy and move selected text, press C+Control+Shift

while you drag and drop.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

MAC OS WINDOWS

FUNCTION COMMAND COMMAND

Go to previous character 77

Go to next character 88

Go to previous line 99

Go to next line 00

Go to previous word C+7Ctrl+7

Go to next word C+8Ctrl+8

Go to beginning of paragraph C+9Ctrl+9

Go to beginning of C+0Ctrl+0

next paragraph

Go to beginning of line C+Option+7Ctrl+Alt+7or Home

Go to end of line C+Option+8Ctrl+Alt+8 or End

Go to beginning of story C+Option+9Ctrl+Alt+9or Ctrl+Home

Go to end of story C+Option+0Ctrl+Alt+0or Ctrl+End

Select all the text in a story C+A Ctrl+A

Select previous word C+Shift+7Ctrl+Shift+7

Chapter 8: Text Basics

164

Editing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 164

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

MAC OS WINDOWS

FUNCTION COMMAND COMMAND

Select next word C+Shift+8Ctrl+Shift+8

Select text to beginning C+Shift+9Ctrl+Shift+9

of paragraph

Select text to end of paragraph C+Shift+0Ctrl+Shift+0

Select text to beginning of line C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+7Shift+7

Select text to end of line C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+8Shift+8

Select text to beginning C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

of story Shift+9Shift+9

Select text to end of story C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+0Shift+0

Cut C+X Ctrl+X

Copy C+C Ctrl+C

Paste C+V Ctrl+V

IMPORTING AND EXPORTING TEXT

QuarkXPress lets you export text in HTML format, and import and export text in a

variety of ﬁle formats: ASCII text, XPress Tags, and formats for popular word process-

ing applications. QuarkXPress includes import/export ﬁlters for XPress Tags format and

for the leading third-party word processors, such as Microsoft Word and WordPerfect.

(For information about XPress Tags, see “XPress Tags” in the “Appendices.”) To use the

import/export ﬁlters, place them in the same folder as your other XTensions software,

and enable them with the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu).

(For information about XTensions software, see “Using XTensions Software” in

Chapter 1, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”)

IMPORTING TEXT

You can import text in many different formats. If you are importing text from a

word processor or in XPress Tags format, make sure the appropriate import/export

ﬁlter is running. To import text:

1Select the Content tool E.

2Place the Text Insertion bar Iin a text box at the point where you want text to

be inserted. If you want imported text to replace a range of text, select the range

to be replaced.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

165

Editing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 165

3Choose File &Get Text (C+E on Mac OS, Ctrl+E on Windows), or display the

context menu for the text box and choose Get Text. For information about

context menus, see Chapter 2, “Context Menus,”in A Guide to QuarkXPress:

Interface Overview.

Use the Get Text dialog box (File menu) to import text ﬁles.

4Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the text ﬁle you want to import. The

Get Text dialog box lists ASCII ﬁles and ﬁles from word processors for which an

import/export ﬁlter is running.

5Select the text ﬁle in the list. When you select a ﬁle, the Type and Size ﬁelds

(Mac OS) or the Format and File Size ﬁelds (Windows) indicate its format

and size.

6Check Convert Quotes to convert double hyphens to em dashes, and foot or

inch marks to typesetter’s apostrophes and quotation marks, when the text is

imported. Foot and inch marks are converted to the quotation marks format

you have specified in the Format pop-up menu (Edit &Preferences &

Preferences &Interactive pane & Quotes area).

7Check Include Style Sheets to import style sheets from a Microsoft Word

or WordPerfect file and add them to the document’s list of style sheets. The

Include Style Sheets feature will also convert XPress Tags code contained

in imported ASCII text to formatted text.

8Click Open.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

166

Importing and Exporting Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 166

∫If all the imported text does not ﬁt in the text box, the overﬂow symbol t

displays. If Auto Page Insertion (Edit &Preferences &Preferences &

General pane) is enabled, pages are inserted (when you import text into an

automatic text box) as necessary to contain the text. P

The import/export ﬁlters recognize most of the common formatting functions

in documents that were created in word processing applications. However,

some word processing features that are not available in QuarkXPress will not

be imported.

åASCII text does not contain formatting information. However, the XPress Tags

coding system in QuarkXPress makes it possible to include character and

paragraph attribute information in ASCII text. You can use any word process-

ing application that can output ASCII text ﬁles to generate text with XPress

Tags code. Then, when you import the ASCII text, QuarkXPress translates the

embedded XPress Tags code and displays formatted text. (For information

about XPress Tags, see “XPress Tags” in the “Appendices.”)

You can quickly format imported ASCII text by specifying character and para-

graph attributes at the text insertion point ibefore you import the text ﬁle.

If you are using straight apostrophe and quotation marks to represent English

foot and inch marks, you may need to replace the curly typesetter’s apostrophe

and quotation marks with straight quotation marks. Enter Control+Shift+"

(Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+" (Windows) for an inch mark and Control+' (Mac OS)

or Ctrl+' (Windows) for a foot mark.

Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to load word process-

ing ﬁlters. (For information about XTensions software, see “Using XTensions

Software” in Chapter 1, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”)

EXPORTING TEXT

You can save text created with QuarkXPress in ﬁle formats that can be opened

by word processing applications and other applications. To export text:

1Make sure that the appropriate export ﬁlter is active.

2To save all the text contained in a text box or a chain of linked boxes, select the

text box (or any of the text boxes in a chain). To save only some of the text in a

story, select the range of text you want to save.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

167

Importing and Exporting Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 167

3Choose File &Save Text (C+Option+E on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+E on Windows), or

display the context menu for the text box and choose Save Text. If you chose

Save Text when a range of text was selected, Selected Text is active. If you did

not select any text, Entire Story is active.

Choose File &Save Text to save selected text or an entire story for exporting, and choose

a format for the saved text in the Format pop-up menu.

4Choose a ﬁle format from the Format pop-up menu. The contents of this menu

can change depending on which import/export ﬁlters are running.

5Enter a name for the file you want to export in the Save text as (Mac OS)

or File name (Windows) field.

6Use the dialog box controls to specify a location for the exported ﬁle. Click Save.

åThe QuarkXPress HTML export feature supports the following text attributes:

•All Caps

•Bold

•Font (Typeface) changes

•Italic

•Strike Thru

•Superscript

•Subscript

•Text Alignment (centered, left, or right)

•Text Color

•Underline

Chapter 8: Text Basics

168

Importing and Exporting Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 168

∫Quark, Inc. has made every attempt to ensure that the QuarkXPress

import/export ﬁlters work with the aforementioned products; however, because

of periodic updating by other manufacturers, we cannot warrant compatibility.

FINDING AND CHANGING TEXT

QuarkXPress lets you ﬁnd and change text and character attributes within a single

story, on every document page, or on every master page using the Find/Change palette

(

+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+F on Windows).

USING THE FIND/CHANGE FEATURE

You can use the Find/Change feature (Edit menu) to search for characters,

words, or phrases, and to replace the text with other characters, words, or

phrases. For example, if you notice that a name is consistently misspelled

throughout a lengthy document, you can use Find/Change to locate and

correct all instances of the misspelled name in a single operation.

1Place the text insertion point iat the location where you want the search

to begin.

2Choose Edit &Find/Change (C+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+F on Windows) to specify

search criteria and to begin a search.

3Enter the text you want to search for in the Find What ﬁeld. You can enter up

to 80 characters in this ﬁeld.

Choose Edit &Find Change (C+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+F on Windows) to open the

Find/Change palette and search and replace text and characters.

åTo search for a word when you are unsure of its spelling, you can specify a

“wild card” character in the Find What ﬁeld by entering C+Shift+? (Mac OS)

or Ctrl+Shift+? (Windows). The character displays as \? in the Find What ﬁeld.

For example, the Find What entry Analy\?e would ﬁnd both Analyze and

Analyse. You cannot enter the wild card character in the Change To ﬁeld.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

169

Importing and Exporting Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 169

4Enter the text to replace found text in the Change To ﬁeld. You can enter up

to 80 characters in this ﬁeld. To delete occurrences of the text in the Find What

ﬁeld, leave the Change To ﬁeld blank and click Change.

5Check Document to ﬁnd and change text throughout an entire document;

uncheck Document to ﬁnd and change text only in the active text box or story.

Check Masters when a master page is displayed to search for and replace text

on all master pages.

∫If Document is checked in the Find/Change palette, QuarkXPress begins a doc-

ument search at the text insertion point i, and searches all remaining stories of a

document through the last page. To search the entire document, press Option

(Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to change the Find Next button to Find First.

QuarkXPress does not search master pages during a document search. To ﬁnd

and change text or character attributes on master pages, you must ﬁrst display a

master page (Page &Display), and check Masters in the Find/Change palette.

If Document is unchecked in the Find/Change palette and a text box is active,

QuarkXPress begins a story search at the text insertion point i. To search the

entire story, use the keyboard command C+Option+9(Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+9

(Windows) to move the text insertion point ito the beginning of the story

before ﬁnding and changing text. Alternatively, you can press Option (Mac OS)

or Alt (Windows) to change the Find Next button to Find First.

6Check Whole Word when you want the text you enter in the Find What ﬁeld

to match only when it occurs as an individual word. When Whole Word is not

checked, QuarkXPress searches for all occurrences of the text in the Find What

ﬁeld, even if the characters are part of other words.

7Check Ignore Case to search for all uppercase and lowercase variations of the

text in the Find What ﬁeld. Uncheck Ignore Case to only ﬁnd exact uppercase

and lowercase matches.

8Check Ignore Attributes to ignore text attributes. To find and change text

attributes, uncheck Ignore Attributes. (For information about attributes,

see “Finding and Changing Attributes” later in this chapter.)

9Click Find Next to begin ﬁnding text matching the criteria you enter; the ﬁrst

occurrence of the text in the Find What field following the text insertion

point iis selected.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

170

Finding and Changing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 170

10 Click the appropriate button to change the selected text:

•Click Change, then Find to replace the selected occurrence with the text in

the Change To ﬁeld, and then ﬁnd the next occurrence of the text in the

Find What ﬁeld.

•Click Change to replace the selected occurrence with the text in the Change

To ﬁeld. Click Find Next again to ﬁnd the next occurrence of the text in the

Find What ﬁeld.

•Click Change All to replace the selected occurrence and all subsequent occur-

rences of the text in the Find What ﬁeld with the text in the Change To ﬁeld.

A dialog box will display the number of instances changed. Click OK.

åIf you press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows), the Find Next button changes

to Find First. If you then click Find First, QuarkXPress ﬁnds the ﬁrst instance

of the text in the Find What ﬁeld in the story or document.

Mac OS only: Click the zoom box in the upper right corner of the Find/Change

palette to reduce the palette to half its size and to display more of the document.

This gives you a better view of the document while you search for and replace

text. Click the zoom box again to expand the palette.

The Find/Change controls are in a palette rather than a dialog box, allowing

you to edit documents while the palette remains open. Simply click on the

active document to make changes and temporarily deactivate the Find/Change

palette (which will appear gray). To reactivate Find/Change, click anywhere

on the palette.

Unless you click Change All, you can manually edit items found with

Find/Change at any time. Click the document to make it active when work-

ing in the Find/Change palette. After you make the edit, click Find Next to

continue the search from the text insertion point i.

USING THE FIND/CHANGE FEATURE WITH LAYERS

If you use the Find/Change feature in a document that contains hidden

layers, QuarkXPress searches the hidden layers as well as the visible layers.

If an instance matching the search criteria is found on a hidden layer,

QuarkXPress will display the hidden text box or text path temporarily to

allow you to see the selection and to change it.

For more information about hidden layers, see “Displaying and Selecting Layers”

in Chapter 15, “Layers.”

Chapter 8: Text Basics

171

Finding and Changing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 171

FINDING AND CHANGING NONPRINTING CHARACTERS

You can use the Find/Change feature to search for and replace many invisible,

nonprinting characters, such as Tab, Return, and Enter characters, by pressing

special key combinations or by entering a special character combinations.

Nonprinting characters are displayed in the Find What and Change To

fields as follows:

DISPLAYS

MAC OS WINDOWS IN THE

TO SEARCH FOR COMMAND COMMAND FIELD AS

Wild card (ﬁnd only) C+Shift+? Ctrl+Shift+? \?

Tab \t\t\t

New paragraph C+Return Ctrl+Enter \p

New line C+Shift+ Ctrl+Shift+ \n

Return Enter

New column C+Enter \c \c

New box C+Shift+ \b \b

Enter

Previous box page number C+2 Ctrl+2 \2

Current box page number C+3 Ctrl+3 \3

Next box page number C+4 Ctrl+4 \4

Punctuation space C+. (period) Ctrl+. (period) \.

Flex space C+Shift+F Ctrl+Shift+F \f

Backslash C+\ Ctrl+\ \\

FINDING AND CHANGING ATTRIBUTES

QuarkXPress lets you ﬁnd and change text and character attributes (font, font size, and

type style) within a single story, on every document page, or on every master page.

FINDING AND CHANGING ATTRIBUTES

When you uncheck Ignore Attributes, the Find/Change palette (Edit &

Find/Change) expands to give you additional search-and-replace criteria. With

the expanded palette, you can use the Find/Change feature to change text,

font, font size, and type style, all at the same time. Or you can change any

combination of text or character attributes.

1Place the text insertion point iat the location where you want the search

to begin.

2Choose Edit &Find/Change (C+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+F on Windows) to

specify search criteria and to begin a search. For information about Find

Chapter 8: Text Basics

172

Finding and Changing Text

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 172

What, Change To, Document, Masters, Whole Word, and Ignore Case

controls in the Find/Change palette, see the preceding section, “Finding

and Changing Text.”

3Uncheck Ignore Attributes to display the Find/Change character attribute

criteria; the palette expands to display the Text, Style Sheet, Font, Size, Color,

and Type Style ﬁelds.

Use the Find/Change palette to change character attributes in a document.

4Check Text to specify that QuarkXPress should use text as a Find What crite-

rion. Enter the text (up to 80 characters) you want to search for in the Text ﬁeld.

If you do not check Text, the application does not consider text in the search,

and the Text ﬁeld is unavailable.

•Check Style Sheet, Font, and Size to specify that QuarkXPress should use these

attributes as Find What criteria. Choose the speciﬁc paragraph or character style

sheet, font, and size. If you do not check a selection, the application does not

consider it in the search, and its corresponding pop-up menu is unavailable.

•Check Color to specify that QuarkXPress should use text color as a Find What

criterion. Choose the text color you want to include in the search. If you do not

check Color, the application does not consider text color in the search, and the

Color pop-up menu is unavailable.

•Check Type Style to specify that QuarkXPress should use type style as a Find

What criterion. Specify the attributes you want to include in the search. If you

do not check Type Style, the application does not consider type style in the

search, and the Type Style area is unavailable.

The Type Style buttons in the Find What area have three states: omitted

(white), allowed (gray), and required (black). To omit text of a particular type

style from the search, make sure the appropriate type style icon remains dese-

lected (white). To require a type style to be included in the search, click it twice

to select it; the icon turns black. To allow (but not require) a type style to be

included in the search, click it once; the icon turns gray. Omitted type styles

must be absent to cause a match; required type styles must be present to cause

a match. If a type style is allowed, it does not matter if the attribute is present.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

173

Finding and Changing Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 173

5Check Text in the Change To area to replace text in the Find What area with

different text. Enter the replacement text (up to 80 characters) in the Text ﬁeld.

If you do not check Text, the application does not replace text in the Find What

area with new text, and the Text ﬁeld is unavailable.

To delete all instances of the text, check Text but do not enter anything in

the field.

Use the Change To area of the Find/Change palette to change found attributes.

•Check Style Sheet, Font, and Size in the Change To area to replace these

attributes with new attributes. Choose a speciﬁc paragraph or character style

sheet, font, and size from the pop-up menus. If you do not check a selection,

the application does not replace the found selection with a new selection, and

the selection’s pop-up menu is unavailable.

•Check Color in the Change To area to replace the found text color with a differ-

ent color. Choose the color from the pop-up menu. If you do not check Color,

the application does not replace the found text color with a new color, and the

Color pop-up menu is unavailable.

•Check Type Style in the Change To area to replace the found type style with

a different type style. Click the attributes you want to include as replacement

type styles. If you do not check Type Style, the application does not replace

the found type style with a new one, and the Type Style area is unavailable.

The Change To Type Style buttons have three states: deselected (white), allowed

(gray), and required (black). Leave a button deselected if you want to strip that

attribute from found text. To allow a type style to remain unchanged in found

text, click once on a button to select it; the icon turns gray. To apply a style to

found text, click twice on a button to select it; the icon turns black.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

174

Finding and Changing Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 174

6QuarkXPress replaces occurrences of text or attributes that meet Find What

criteria with the text or attributes you specify as Change To criteria when you

click Change, then Find; Change; or Change All during a search.

7Click Find Next to begin searching for and replacing text or character attributes

using the criteria you enter. The ﬁrst occurrence of the text in the Find What

area following the insertion point is selected.

8Click Change, then Find to replace the selected occurrence with the text or

attributes in the Change To area and then ﬁnd the next occurrence.

•Click Change to replace the selected occurrence with the text or attributes in

the Change To area. Click Find Next again to ﬁnd the next occurrence.

•Click Change All to replace the selected occurrence and all subsequent occur-

rences of the text or attributes in the Find What area with the text or attributes

in the Change To area. An alert will display the number of instances replaced.

Click OK.

åUnchecking Ignore Attributes allows multiple options. For example, you

could use the Find/Change feature to convert occurrences of the word “bike”

in 18-point Helvetica Bold to ”Bicycle” in 24-point Futura Extra Bold. To do

so, use the ﬁelds in the expanded Find/Change palette to deﬁne the text and

character attributes that you want QuarkXPress to search for and replace.

The Font pop-up menu in the Find What area lists only those fonts used in the

document. The Font pop-up menu in the Change To area lists all fonts available

to your system.

The following type styles are mutually exclusive: Underline and Word Under-

line, Small Caps and All Caps, and Superscript and Subscript. Checking one

option unchecks the other. For example, the same text cannot be both super-

script and subscript.

Clicking the Plain button in either the Find What or Change To side of the

Find/Change palette unchecks all other type styles.

You can manually edit occurrences found with Find/Change at any time. Click

the document to activate it and edit the text as necessary. After you make a

change, choose Find/Change again and click Find Next to continue the search

from the text insertion point i.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

175

Finding and Changing Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 175

CHANGING FONTS IN A DOCUMENT

Because knowing which fonts are specified is important when you print,

QuarkXPress includes features that let you list and change all the fonts used in a

document. The Collect For Output (File menu) report lists the font usage informa-

tion, which is useful when you take your document to a service provider for printing.

The Fonts tab in the Usage dialog box (Utilities menu) lists all the screen fonts and

style variations used on document pages or master pages, allowing you to ensure that

the necessary PostScript fonts are available to print the document correctly. The Fonts

tab also lets you ﬁnd and change all occurrences of a font. When you use this feature,

QuarkXPress scrolls through the document to display the ﬁrst occurrence of the font;

you can then replace all occurrences of that font with another.

CHANGING FONTS

To display the fonts used in a document and selectively make document-wide

font changes:

1Choose Utilities &Usage &Fonts tab.

To display the fonts used on a master page and selectively make font changes,

choose Utilities &Usage &Fonts tab when viewing a master page.

Use the Fonts tab (Utilities &Usage) to replace fonts.

2Choose a font from the list. All fonts in the document, including the font speciﬁed

at the text insertion point iof an empty text box, are listed in the Fonts tab.

To select multiple fonts, press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click

each font name. To select a consecutive range of fonts, click the ﬁrst font name

and press Shift while you click the last font name in the range.

3Check More Information to display the font characteristics of the selected

font. This information includes the font’s PostScript name, ﬁle name, type,

and version.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

176

Changing Fonts in a Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 176

4Click Show First to display the first instance of the font in the document or

master page. Click Show Next to display the next instance of the font.

5Click Replace to replace the speciﬁed font with another font. Choose a font

from the Replacement Font pop-up menu. To replace the font or fonts selected

in the Current Font ﬁeld list with a plain, bold, or italic version of the font

selected in the Replacement Font ﬁeld, click the appropriate type style button;

you can simultaneously select bold and italic. Click OK.

Choose a replacement font from the Replace Font dialog box to change fonts within

a document.

6An alert displays. If you want to replace all instances of the font with the

replacement font, click OK. The font will be replaced throughout the document

or master pages, depending on which is speciﬁed.

7Repeat steps 2–6 to replace other fonts within the document or master

page. Click Done (Mac OS) or Close (Windows) when you finish making

modifications

åIf a font is listed in the Fonts tab (Utilities &Usage) as <Name of Font>pre-

ceded by a negative number, the system you are using does not have that font

installed. When this occurs, you can install the necessary font and reopen the

document, or you can use the Usage feature to locate occurrences of the font

and apply a different font.

You may see “missing fonts” or “unknown” messages listed in the Fonts tab

(Utilities &Usage). These messages occasionally display when you work with

documents across platforms because the system you are using may not recog-

nize the same font from the other platform, even when the font has the same

name. To correct this, simply replace the missing or unknown font with the

same font on the system you are using.

When using an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) picture containing fonts,

QuarkXPress requires both screen and printer fonts (if you are using Type 1 fonts)

or the TrueType font to create the high-resolution output of text contained in the

picture. However, the Usage dialog box does not list fonts contained in imported

EPS pictures; if you are not sure what fonts are used in an EPS picture, open the

picture in its original application to check font usage.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

177

Changing Fonts in a Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 177

åMac OS only: Whenever a font used in a document is not available on the printer

when printing, a low-resolution version of the font is generated from its screen

information and will be used to represent the characters.

If you open a document that contains characters for which your system does

not have a screen font with the same name or I.D. number, an alert displays.

QuarkXPress uses the default system font to display the characters of the

missing font. You can replace the missing font when the alert displays.

∫If a font is listed as <unknown> in the Fonts list (Utilities &Usage &

Font tab), QuarkXPress is unable to identify that font.

Mac OS only: If the font I.D. number of the font speciﬁed in the word processing

document is the same as the I.D. number of a font installed on your computer’s

system, QuarkXPress will apply the font installed on your computer to all occur-

rences of the text with that font I.D. number. If the font I.D. number of the font

speciﬁed in the word processing document is not associated with a font installed

on your computer, QuarkXPress will use the default system font to display the

characters of the missing font. You can use the Usage feature to locate occur-

rences of an <unknown> font and replace it with the font you want to use.

CHECKING SPELLING

QuarkXPress lets you check the spelling of a single word, a selection of text, an active

story, an entire document, or the text on master pages.

CHECKING SPELLING

To check spelling, a copy of the appropriate dictionary file (included with

your QuarkXPress application) must be available in the same folder as the

QuarkXPress application. When you open an auxiliary dictionary for use with

a document, QuarkXPress uses the words it contains in addition to the words

in the application dictionary when it checks spelling. (For information about

creating and using auxiliary dictionaries, see “Using Auxiliary Dictionaries”

later in this chapter.)

CHECKING THE SPELLING OF A WORD

To check the spelling of a word:

1Place the text insertion point iwithin or immediately next to the word.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

178

Changing Fonts in a Document

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 178

2Choose Utilities &Check Spelling &Word (C+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+W

on Windows).

Choose Utilities &Check Spelling &Word to display the Check Word dialog box.

3In the Check Word dialog box, enter the correct spelling in the Replace with

ﬁeld or click Look up to check the dictionary ﬁle and an open auxiliary dic-

tionary for words similar to the suspect word.

4To add the word to the open auxiliary dictionary and close the Check Word

dialog box, click Add. The Add button is active when an auxiliary dictionary

is open for use with the document.

5Click Replace to replace the suspect word with the text in the Replace with

ﬁeld, or click Done (Mac OS) or Close (Windows) to cancel the spell check.

CHECKING THE SPELLING OF A SELECTION OF TEXT, A STORY, OR

A DOCUMENT

1To check the spelling of a:

•Selection of text: Using the Content tool E, select one or more characters,

words, or paragraphs. Choose Utilities &Check Spelling &Selection (C+L on

Mac OS, Ctrl+W on Windows).

•Story: Activate a text box. Choose Utilities &Check Spelling &Story

(C+Option+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+W on Windows).

•Document: Choose Utilities &Check Spelling &Document

(C+Option+Shift+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+W on Windows).

Choose Utilities &Check Spelling & Selection, Story, or Document to display the

Word Count dialog box.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

179

Checking Spelling

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 179

2The Word Count dialog box displays three ﬁelds: Total, Unique, and Suspect.

The Total ﬁeld displays the number of words checked; the Unique ﬁeld displays

the number of different words; and the Suspect ﬁeld displays the number of

words that cannot be found in either the QuarkXPress dictionary or the open

auxiliary dictionary. Click OK in the Word Count dialog box to proceed with

the spell check.

3Use the Check Selection, Check Story, or Check Document dialog box to view

the suspect words and selectively replace them with words from a dictionary or

words that you enter.

Look up, skip, add, or replace words in the Check Selection, Check Story or Check

Document dialog box.

•The Suspect Word ﬁeld displays the suspect words one at a time, in the order in

which they were found. The number of times the word is used in the document

is displayed in parentheses after the suspect word.

•Enter the correctly spelled word in the Replace with ﬁeld to replace the suspect

word, then click Replace. QuarkXPress replaces the current suspect word with

the word you enter, then displays the next suspect word in the Suspect Word

ﬁeld. When all the suspect words have been displayed, the dialog box closes.

∫When you click Replace, QuarkXPress replaces all instances of the suspect word.

•Click Look up to check the dictionary ﬁle and an open auxiliary dictionary for

words similar to the current suspect word. QuarkXPress lists similar words in the

dialog box. Click the correctly spelled word in the list to enter it in the Replace

with ﬁeld.

If QuarkXPress is unable to locate any similar words in the dictionary ﬁle or

an open auxiliary dictionary when you click Look up, the message “No similar

words found” displays. Proper names and words in other languages often cause

this message to display.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

180

Checking Spelling

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 180

•Click Add to add the current suspect word to the open auxiliary dictionary.

The Add button is active when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with

the document.

•Click Skip to proceed to the next suspect word without changing the spelling

of the current one.

•Click Done (Mac OS) or Close (Windows) to stop the spell check and keep any

changes already made.

åYou can spell check master pages by displaying a master page and choosing

Utilities &Check Spelling &Masters.

To obtain the word count for a document, choose Utilities &Check

Spelling &Document. The Word Count dialog box displays; the Total

field displays the total word count for the document. Click Cancel to

return to the document window.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

MAC OS WINDOWS

START SPELL CHECK COMMAND COMMAND

Check Word/Selection C+L Ctrl+W

Check Story C+Option+L Ctrl+Alt+W

Check Document C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+L Shift+W

CHECK SPELLING MAC OS WINDOWS

DIALOG BOX BUTTON COMMAND COMMAND

Look up C+L Alt+L

Skip C+S Alt+S

Add C+A Alt+A

CHECKING SPELLING WITH LAYERS

When spell checking a document or story, QuarkXPress searches all layers in the

document or selected story for misspellings. If questionable spelling is encoun-

tered on a hidden layer, QuarkXPress will display the hidden text box or text

path temporarily, to allow you to determine if the word needs to be replaced.

For more information about hidden layers, see “Displaying and Selecting Layers”

in Chapter 15, “Layers.”

Chapter 8: Text Basics

181

Checking Spelling

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 181

USING AUXILIARY DICTIONARIES

Some documents contain specialized words that are not in the dictionary ﬁle that

installs with QuarkXPress. If you need to use such words, you can create your own

auxiliary dictionaries for the specialized words. Auxiliary dictionaries augment the

QuarkXPress dictionary file and make spell checking faster because fewer suspect

words are identiﬁed. When you open an auxiliary dictionary for use with an active

document, QuarkXPress uses the words in the auxiliary dictionary in addition to the

120,000 words contained in the QuarkXPress dictionary ﬁle. You can make copies

of auxiliary dictionaries and exchange them with other QuarkXPress users.

CREATING, OPENING, AND CLOSING AUXILIARY DICTIONARIES

To create, open, or close an auxiliary dictionary:

1Choose Utilities &Auxiliary Dictionary.

•New: Enter a name for the dictionary you create in the New Auxiliary

Dictionary (Mac OS) or File Name (Windows) field. Use the dialog box

controls to select the volume and folder in which you want to save the

auxiliary dictionary. Click New.

•Open: Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the dictionary you want to

open. Select the dictionary and click Open.

•Close: Click Close to close an auxiliary dictionary. When no dictionary is open

for use, the Current Auxiliary Dictionary ﬁeld displays <None> and the Close

button is not available.

Create auxiliary dictionaries for unique words (Utilities &Auxiliary Dictionary &New).

Chapter 8: Text Basics

182

Using Auxiliary Dictionaries

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 182

åOnly one auxiliary dictionary at a time can be open for use with a document.

However, the same dictionary can be used with any number of documents.

If you open an auxiliary dictionary when no document is open, the dictionary

you open becomes the default auxiliary dictionary for all subsequently

created documents.

If an auxiliary dictionary is opened for use with a document, it remains associ-

ated with that document (even if you save the document to another disk) until

you click Close in the Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box or until you open a

different auxiliary dictionary.

Auxiliary dictionaries are saved as separate ﬁles on your hard drive. The path

to the auxiliary dictionary is saved with the document. If you move an open

auxiliary dictionary to another folder or volume, QuarkXPress will be unable

to ﬁnd it. To check the spelling of a document associated with a missing aux-

iliary dictionary, choose Utilities &Auxiliary Dictionary, then locate and

open the auxiliary dictionary. If you cannot locate the auxiliary dictionary,

click Close.

ADDING WORDS TO AUXILIARY DICTIONARIES

The Edit Auxiliary feature is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for

use with the active document or when a default auxiliary dictionary is open.

To add words to an open auxiliary dictionary:

1Choose Utilities &Edit Auxiliary.

2Enter the new words you want in the ﬁeld below the list; click Add after each

word you enter to add it to the dictionary.

3Click Save when you have ﬁnished adding words.

∫To add words to an open auxiliary dictionary while you are checking the

spelling of a document (Utilities &Check Spelling), click Add in the Check

Word, Check Story, or Check Document dialog box. Pressing Option+Shift

(Mac OS) or Alt+Shift (Windows) while you click Done (Mac OS) or Close

(Windows) adds all suspect words found to the open auxiliary dictionary.

The Add button is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use

with the active document.

Chapter 8: Text Basics

183

Using Auxiliary Dictionaries

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 183

Chapter 9: Typography

In text, as in speech, words can be whispered or screamed. Typography is the art of

making the appearance of your text convey the tone or meaning of the content. When

the eye and the mind are engaged in your text, you have achieved typographic success.

QuarkXPress lets you control the tone of your text by letting you adjust every facet of

typography, including typefaces, type styles, leading, and spacing. With these precise

controls, you can make your words roar or murmur.

CONFIRMING TYPOGRAPHIC PREFERENCES P

Typographic preferences affect the way the text ﬂows in a document. If you change

these preferences later in the publishing process, you may face text reﬂow, so plan

ahead. When you create a new document, conﬁrm that the typographic preferences

meet your needs before you start working with text. Some of these preferences include

customizable type styles, leading control, ligature control, and baseline grid settings.

The preferences that affect typography are in the Character and Paragraph panes

of the Preferences dialog box (Edit

Preferences

Preferences). For detailed

information about the controls in these panes, see Chapter 4, “Edit Menu,” in

“A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.”

To conﬁrm typographic preferences:

1Create or open the document for which you want to confirm typographic

settings. If you want to configure typographic settings for all subsequently

created documents, make sure no documents are open.

2Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences. The Preferences dialog

box displays.

Chapter 9: Typography

184

Conﬁrming Typographic Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 184

Use the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences) to conﬁrm Paragraph

and Character settings before you start formatting text.

3Click Paragraph in the list on the left and conﬁrm that the paragraph settings

are the way you want them. Check and change any of the settings to suit your

document, and catch your reader’s attention. In particular, pay attention to the

following settings:

•Leading: If you are using auto leading, be sure to conﬁrm the value in the Auto

Leading ﬁeld. Unless you are trying to match the line spacing of a document

that originated in a word processing application, choose Typesetting for the

Leading mode. To keep line spacing consistent when lines of text touch the

bottom of obstructing items, such as picture boxes, check Maintain Leading.

•Baseline Grid: If you are planning to lock paragraphs to a baseline grid to

ensure that lines align from column to column, check the settings in the

Baseline Grid area. The value in the Start field specifies the distance from

the top of a page to the first line in the grid. The value in the Increment

field determines the space between lines in the grid.

4The Method pop-up menu in the Hyphenation area lets you specify the

method QuarkXPress uses to automatically hyphenate paragraphs when there

is no corresponding entry found in your Hyphenation Exceptions dictionary.

The setting you choose affects only paragraphs for which Auto Hyphenation

(Edit &H&Js) is enabled.

•Choose Standard to hyphenate using the algorithm built into versions of

QuarkXPress prior to 3.1. Documents created in versions of QuarkXPress prior

to 3.1 default to Standard when they are opened in version 3.1 or later.

•The Enhanced lets you hyphenate using the algorithm built into QuarkXPress

as of version 3.1.

Chapter 9: Typography

185

Conﬁrming Typographic Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 185

•The Expanded uses the same algorithm as the Enhanced option but checks

any built-in hyphenation dictionaries before resorting to the algorithm. This is

the default method for documents created in this version of QuarkXPress.

5Click Character in the list on the left and conﬁrm that the character settings

are the way you want them. Check and change any of the settings to suit your

document, and catch your reader’s attention. In particular, pay attention to the

following settings:

•Superscript, Subscript, Small Caps, and Superior type styles: You can

customize these type styles on a document-wide basis. Note that superscript

and subscript characters may cause uneven line spacing in paragraphs that

use auto leading.

•Mac OS only: Ligatures: If you want to use the ligatures for “ﬁ” and “ﬂ” that are

contained in many Mac OS fonts, check Ligatures. You can specify a tracking or

kerning value above which characters are not combined into ligatures in the

Break Above ﬁeld. For example, in a widely spaced headline, you might not

want a ligature. To prevent instances of “fﬁ” and “fﬂ” (as in “ofﬁce” and “rufﬂe”)

from being combined into ligatures, check Not “fﬁ” or “fﬂ.”

∫Documents created in previous versions of QuarkXPress maintain their hyphen-

ation method (Standard or Enhanced) when opened in a newer version. If you

choose Expanded for these documents, text reﬂow may occur.

6After conﬁrming all the preferences, click OK.

åIf you use the same preferences frequently (for example, if you always check

Ligatures), specify typographic preferences when no documents are open.

The new setting will apply to all new documents.

APPLYING CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES P

QuarkXPress gives you precise control over type, letting you apply styles to text on a

character-by-character basis. Each character can have almost any combination of the

styles available, including font, size, type style, and color. Styles for text, referred to as

character attributes, are applied to selected text, or at the text insertion point

to affect

text entered thereafter.

CHOOSING A FONT

QuarkXPress has access to all the fonts currently installed and available on your

system. You can apply a font choice to selected text or at the text insertion

point iusing any of the following options:

Chapter 9: Typography

186

Conﬁrming Typographic Preferences

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 186

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Font and choose a font from the submenu.

MEASUREMENTS PALETTE

Click the arrow <next to the current font name and choose a font from the

list. You can also select the current font name in the ﬁeld, enter the ﬁrst few

characters of the font name until it is recognized, and press Return (Mac OS)

or Enter (Windows).

Choose a font for selected text from the right side of the Measurements palette.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

You can change fonts quickly while you are typing by pressing

C+Option+Shift+M (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+M (Windows) to jump directly

to the font ﬁeld in the Measurements palette. Enter the ﬁrst few characters of

the font name until it is recognized, press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows),

then continue typing. To choose the next font in the pop-up menu, press

Option+F9 (Mac OS) or Ctrl+F9 (Windows). For the previous font, press

Option+Shift+F9 (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+F9 (Windows).

åYou can group character and paragraph attributes as a style sheet. Using style

sheets helps streamline production and maintain consistent formatting. For

information about using style sheets, see “Working with Style Sheets” later

in this chapter.

CHOOSING A SIZE

QuarkXPress lets you use font sizes from 2 to 720 points. You can apply a

font size to selected text or at the text insertion point iusing any of the

following options:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Size and choose a point size from the submenu. Alternately,

choose Other (C+Shift+\ on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+\ on Windows) and enter

a value in the Size ﬁeld. Click OK.

MEASUREMENTS PALETTE

Click the arrow <next to the current font size to display a list of point sizes;

choose a size from the list. You can also select the current font size in the ﬁeld,

enter a new point size, and press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

Choose a size for selected text from the right side of the Measurements palette.

Chapter 9: Typography

187

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 187

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

QuarkXPress increases or decreases font sizes according to the following preset

range: 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 96, 120, 144, 168, and 192 points.

MAC OS WINDOWS

CHANGE IN FONT SIZE COMMAND COMMAND

Increase 1 pt C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+> Shift+>

Decrease 1 pt C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+< Shift+<

Increase in preset range C+Shift+> Ctrl+Shift+>

Decrease in preset range C+Shift+< Ctrl+Shift+<

åYou can resize all the text in a box by pressing modiﬁer keys while dragging

a text box handle.

Press C (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) to resize the box, point size, auto leading,

and text scaling in proportion to the box dimensions.

Press C+Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift (Windows) to resize the

box, point size, auto leading, and text scaling in proportion to the original

box dimensions.

You cannot use modiﬁer keys to resize text when resizing a linked text box.

CHOOSING TYPE STYLES

Type styles can be applied in almost any combination, such as Bold Italic

Underline. You can apply type styles to selected text or at the text insertion

point iusing any of the following options:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Type Style and choose a type style from the submenu. To

apply additional styles, choose the Type Style submenu again and make

additional choices.

CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES DIALOG BOX

Choose Style &Character (C+Shift+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+D on Windows)

and click check boxes in the Type Style area to specify styles.

Chapter 9: Typography

188

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 188

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

Click one or more type style icons in the Measurements palette or press the

appropriate keyboard commands.

TYPE STYLE MAC OS WINDOWS

COMMAND COMMAND

Plain PC+Shift+P Ctrl+Shift+P

Bold BC+Shift+B Ctrl+Shift+B

Italic IC+Shift+I Ctrl+Shift+I

Underline UC+Shift+U Ctrl+Shift+U

Word Underline W*C+Shift+W Ctrl+Shift+W

Strike Thru ?C+Shift+/ Ctrl+Shift+/

Outline O*C+Shift+O Ctrl+Shift+O

Shadow S*C+Shift+S Ctrl+Shift+S

All Caps KC+Shift+K Ctrl+Shift+K

Small Caps H*C+Shift+H Ctrl+Shift+H

Superscript +C+Shift+ + Ctrl+Shift+0

Subscript _C+Shift+ –Ctrl+Shift+9

Superior M*C+Shift+V Ctrl+Shift+V

* Not available in HTML text boxes.

∫Some type styles are mutually exclusive and cannot be combined: Underline and

Word Underline, Small Caps and All Caps, and Superscript and Subscript.

åTo remove a type style from selected text, choose the Type Style submenu

option again, click the Measurements palette icon again, or press the keyboard

command again. To remove all styles from selected text, choose Plain. You can

also uncheck style options in the Type Style area in the Character Attributes

dialog box (Style &Character).

You can customize the Superscript, Subscript, Small Caps, and Superior

type styles for a document using the Character pane in the Preferences dialog

box (Edit &Preferences & Preferences &Document &Character pane).

For example, you can make Small Caps characters taller or specify that Sub-

script characters drop lower.

Chapter 9: Typography

189

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 189

CHOOSING A COLOR AND SHADE

QuarkXPress lists all the colors deﬁned for a document — default colors, colors

created in the Colors dialog box (Edit menu), and spot colors imported with

EPS picture ﬁles. You can apply a color and shade to selected text or at the text

insertion point iusing any of the following options:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Color and choose a color from the submenu. Choose Style &

Shade and choose a percentage value from the submenu. Or, choose Style &

Shade &Other and enter a value in the Shade ﬁeld of the Character Attributes

dialog box (Style &Character). Click OK.

COLORS PALETTE

Choose View &Show Colors (F12). Click the text icon T, then click one of

the colors listed. Click the Shade pop-up arrow <next to the current shade

percentage to display a list of values; choose a percentage from the list. You

can also select the current shade value in the ﬁeld, enter a new value, and

press Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

The text icon Tand the shade percentage pop-up menu at the top of the Colors palette let

you choose a color and shade for selected text.

åTo create reverse type, use light text in a text box with a dark background.

You can also position reverse type within a rule above or a rule below. For

information about anchored rules, see “Creating Rules Above and Below

Paragraphs” in Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

APPLYING HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL SCALE

QuarkXPress lets you condense or expand characters so they are narrower or

wider, and taller or shorter than speciﬁed in the original font. You can apply

horizontal/vertical scaling to selected text or at the text insertion point iusing

any of the following options:

Chapter 9: Typography

190

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 190

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Horizontal/Vertical Scale. Choose Horizontal or Vertical from

the Scale pop-up menu and enter a value in the ﬁeld. Click OK.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

The keyboard commands work for both horizontal or vertical scaling. If a range

of text is selected that has both horizontal and vertical scaling applied, the key-

board commands will increase or decrease the text accordingly.

MAC OS WINDOWS

CHANGE IN SCALE COMMAND COMMAND

Condense 5% C+[ Ctrl+[

Expand 5% C+] Ctrl+]

Condense 1% C+Option+[ Ctrl+Alt+]

Expand 1% C+Option+] Ctrl+Alt+[

This example shows 30-point type scaled 150% vertically (at left), normal (middle), and 150%

horizontally (at right).

∫You cannot apply horizontal and vertical scaling values simultaneously. When

you apply vertical scaling to horizontally scaled text, the text reverts to a

horizontal scale of 100%. When you apply horizontal scaling to vertically

scaled text, the text reverts to a vertical scale of 100%.

åOverscaling characters can have an undesirable effect on the font design. You

may want to print samples of scaled text to ensure that none of the strokes are

too thick or too thin.

CHANGING TEXT BASELINES

QuarkXPress lets you place characters above or below their baseline without

affecting paragraph spacing. A positive value raises the text; a negative value

lowers the text. You can apply baseline shift to selected text or at the text

insertion point iusing any of the following options:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Baseline Shift and enter a value in the Baseline Shift ﬁeld.

Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

191

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 191

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

Keyboard commands let you shift characters up or down one point.

MAC OS WINDOWS

SHIFT CHARACTERS COMMAND COMMAND

Down 1 pt C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+ –Shift+9

Up 1 pt C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+ + Shift+0

This example shows 24-point type; the Q has a baseline shift value of – 10 points, the X a

value of 10 points.

∫When you change the size of characters that have a baseline shift applied, the

baseline shift value is automatically increased or decreased proportionally.

APPLYING MULTIPLE CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES

You can view and edit all character attributes at one time using the Character

Attributes dialog box. This dialog box combines many Style menu commands

and indicates the style of selected text or new text entered at the text insertion

point i. To quickly specify multiple character attributes:

1Choose Style &Character (C+Shift+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+D on Windows).

Use the Character Attributes dialog box (Style menu) to apply multiple character attributes

in one step.

Chapter 9: Typography

192

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 192

2Choose a font from the Font pop-up menu. You can also select the current font

name in the ﬁeld and enter the ﬁrst few characters of the new font name until

it is recognized.

3Choose a point size from the Size pop-up menu. You can also select the current

font size in the ﬁeld and enter a new point size.

4Choose a color from the Color pop-up menu.

5Choose a color percentage from the Shade pop-up menu. You can also select the

current shade and enter a new percentage value.

6Choose Horizontal or Vertical from the Scale pop-up menu and enter a per-

centage value in the Scale ﬁeld. (Not available in HTML text boxes.)

7Enter a value in the Track Amount ﬁeld. (Not available in HTML text boxes.)

If no text is selected, the Track Amount ﬁeld is replaced by the Kern Amount

field. However, only the current character pair can be kerned. (The current

character pair is the pair the text insertion point iis placed between.) The Kern

Amount ﬁeld is unavailable if the text insertion point iis at the beginning of a

paragraph. For information about kerning and tracking, see “Specifying Kerning

and Tracking” later in this chapter.

8Enter a value in the Baseline Shift ﬁeld. (Not available in HTML text boxes.)

9Use the check boxes in the Type Style area to apply and remove type styles.

To remove all type styles, check Plain.

10 When you are ﬁnished specifying character attributes, click OK.

∫Blank fields and gray check boxes in the Character Attributes dialog box

indicate that multiple styles are applied to selected text. For example, if the

Font field is blank, then more than one font is applied to the selected text.

åIf you enter a value in a blank ﬁeld in the Character Attributes dialog box,

that value will be applied to all the selected text. If you check or uncheck a gray

check box, that style setting will be applied to or removed from all selected text.

Chapter 9: Typography

193

Applying Character Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 193

SPECIFYING KERNING AND TRACKING

Kerning is the adjustment of space between character pairs. Because of their shapes,

certain character pairs look better when kerned. QuarkXPress can perform kerning

automatically, and you can also use manual kerning controls to specify additional

kerning between characters. Tracking lets you adjust the space between selected

characters and words for copyﬁtting and typographic effects.

KERNING TEXT

Kerning lets you adjust the amount of space between two characters. Kerning

values are expressed as 1⁄200 of an em space. The em space used for kerning incre-

ments is determined by the Standard Em Space setting in the Character pane

of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preference &Docu-

ment). Check Standard Em Space for an em space that is equivalent to the

point size of the text (for example, 24-point text has a 24-point em space).

Uncheck Standard Em Space to use the QuarkXPress deﬁned em space,

which is the width of two zeros in a given font. A standard em space is gen-

erally smaller than a QuarkXPress em space.

This example shows the effect of –20 (–20⁄200 em) kerning between the “L” and the “a” on the

left, no kerning in the middle, and +20 (20⁄200 em) kerning on the right.

Because kerning is expressed as a fraction of an em space relative to the font and

size of the characters, rather than as an absolute value, kerning adjustments

applied to a character pair will remain proportional if you later change the font

size of the kerned characters.

A positive kerning value increases the amount of space between characters;

a negative value decreases it. When text is selected, the Kern command is

replaced by Track in the Style menu. Kern is not available when the text

insertion point iimmediately precedes the first character in a paragraph.

Place the Text Insertion bar Ibetween the two characters you want to kern,

then use any of the following options to apply kerning.

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Kern and enter a value in the Kern Amount ﬁeld. Click OK.

MEASUREMENTS PALETTE

Select the kerning ﬁeld, enter a new value, and press Return (Mac OS) or Enter

(Windows). Alternately, click the kerning icons Nto increase or decrease kerning

in 1⁄20-em increments. Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) and click the

icons to kern in 1⁄200-em increments.

Chapter 9: Typography

194

Specifying Kerning and Tracking

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 194

To adjust kerning when the text insertion point iis between two characters, click the kerning

icons Nin the Measurements palette.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

Keyboard commands let you increase and decrease kerning values in 1⁄20-em

and 1⁄200-em increments.

MAC OS WINDOWS

CHANGE IN KERNING COMMAND COMMAND

Decrease 1⁄20-em C+Shift+{ Ctrl+Shift+{

Increase 1⁄20-em C+Shift+} Ctrl+Shift+}

Decrease 1⁄200-em C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+} Shift+}

Increase 1⁄200-em C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+} Shift+}

åFor detailed kerning work, increase your view scale to 400% or 800%. Then,

check the kerning at Actual Size within the context of the entire layout. Be sure

to conﬁrm the kerning on printed output as well.

∫Kerning is not available in HTML text boxes.

KERNING AUTOMATICALLY

You can specify that QuarkXPress automatically kern text above a speciﬁc point

size by using the kerning tables built into most fonts and any kerning tables you

have edited with the Kern-Track Editor (Utilities menu). To specify automatic

kerning for the active document:

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences, then click Character in the list on

the left to display the Character pane.

Specify automatic kerning using the Auto Kern Above check box and ﬁeld in the Character

pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences).

2Check Auto Kern Above.

Chapter 9: Typography

195

Specifying Kerning and Tracking

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 195

3To specify the point size above which text will be automatically kerned, enter

a value in the ﬁeld.

4Click OK.

åWhen Auto Kern Above is checked in the Character pane of the Preferences

dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences), auto kerning is applied in

addition to manual kerning if the point size is larger than the value speciﬁed.

Manual kerning is always applied whether the check box is checked or not.

Why should you use the Auto Kern Above feature? Because it does a lot of

detailed kerning work for you, and it does so according to the font designer’s

specifications. In general, use automatic kerning and set Auto Kern Above

to 2 or 4 points so that all text is automatically kerned.

EDITING KERNING TABLES

When QuarkXPress performs automatic kerning, the program uses kerning

information that is built into the font. This information is stored in the font’s

kerning table. A kerning table contains a number of character pairs —“

Ta,” for

example — and an associated kerning value for each pair in the table. When

QuarkXPress displays characters on-screen and prints them, it uses the font’s

kerning table information.

Editing a font’s kerning table reduces the need for extensive manual kerning. To

edit a font’s kerning table, use the Kern-Track Editor QuarkXTensions software

included with QuarkXPress. For information about kerning controls available

through the Kern-Track Editor, see Chapter 9, “Utilities Menu,” in A Guide to

QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.

TRACKING TEXT

Tracking lets you adjust the space between selected characters and words for

copyﬁtting and special typographic effects. Tracking values are expressed as 1⁄200

of an em space. The em space used for tracking increments is determined by the

Standard Em Space setting in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog

box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences). Check Standard Em Space for an em

space that is equivalent to the point size of the text (for example, 24-point text

has a 24-point em space). Uncheck Standard Em Space to use the QuarkXPress

deﬁned em space, which is the width of two zeros in a given font. A standard

em space is generally smaller than a QuarkXPress em space.

This example shows 36-point type tracked +20 (20⁄200 em) left, and –20 (–20⁄200 em) right.

Chapter 9: Typography

196

Specifying Kerning and Tracking

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 196

A positive tracking value increases the space to the right of each character; a

negative value decreases it. When no text is selected, Track is replaced by Kern

in the Style menu. Select the text you want to track, then use any of the follow-

ing options to apply tracking:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Track and enter a value in the Track Amount ﬁeld. Click OK.

MEASUREMENTS PALETTE AND KEYBOARD COMMANDS

Select the tracking ﬁeld, enter a new value, and press Return (Mac OS) or Enter

(Windows). Alternately, click the tracking icons Nto increase or decrease track-

ing in

⁄

-em increments. Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) and click the

icons to track in

⁄

200

-em increments.

Click the tracking icons Nin the Measurements palette to adjust the tracking of selected text.

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

Keyboard commands let you increase and decrease tracking values in 1⁄20-em and

1⁄200-em increments.

MAC OS WINDOWS

CHANGE IN TRACKING COMMAND COMMAND

Decrease 1⁄20-em C+Shift+{ Ctrl+Shift+{

Increase 1⁄20-em C+Shift+} Ctrl+Shift+}

Decrease 1⁄200-em C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+{ Shift+{

Increase 1⁄200-em C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+} Shift+}

åTracking is commonly used for copyﬁtting — for example, negative tracking is

often used to pull in a word. However, too much tracking can interfere with

design and readability. When you are using tracking for copyﬁtting, consider

these guidelines: track whole paragraphs rather than one line or one word;

establish guidelines for tracking (for example from +3 to –3); and make sure

vertically adjacent paragraphs have similar tracking applied. These are general

rules; appropriate tracking values depend on the design, font, column width,

and other factors.

Chapter 9: Typography

197

Specifying Kerning and Tracking

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 197

EDITING TRACKING TABLES

If you are applying tracking to most of your text, you can save time by editing

the font’s tracking tables. To edit a font’s tracking table, use the Kern-Track

Editor QuarkXTensions software included with QuarkXPress. For information

about tracking controls available through the Kern-Track Editor, see Chapter 9,

“Utilities Menu,” in A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview.

APPLYING PARAGRAPH ATTRIBUTES P

QuarkXPress gives you precise control over the spacing of text by specifying paragraph

attributes such as alignment, indents, leading, and tab settings. Paragraph attributes

are applied to the selected paragraph (the paragraph containing the text insertion

point

) or to a range of selected paragraphs through the Paragraph Attributes dialog

box (Style

Formats). Some paragraph attributes can also be applied using the

Measurements palette.

To apply attributes to selected paragraphs:

1Choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on Windows).

2Change any of the settings in the Formats and Tabs tabs. For information

about speciﬁc controls in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box, see Chapter 5,

“Style Menu,” in A Guide to QuarkXPress: Interface Overview, and the remainder

of this chapter.

•You can enter values in ﬁelds using any QuarkXPress supported measurement

system. When you enter a value without specifying a measurement system,

QuarkXPress uses the default measurement system chosen in the Horizontal

Measure or Vertical Measure pop-up menu in the Measurements pane of the

Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences). Leading always

displays in points.

•A blank ﬁeld in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box or the Measurements

palette indicates that more than one value is speciﬁed for the selected paragraphs.

3If you want to see the effect of the changes, click Apply.

4Click OK.

åYou can specify paragraph formats when creating style sheets. This lets you

quickly apply a number of formats at one time. When you modify the para-

graph attributes of a style sheet, all the paragraphs to which that style sheet

has been applied are automatically updated to reﬂect the modiﬁcations.

Chapter 9: Typography

198

Specifying Kerning and Tracking

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 198

åYou can copy any applied paragraph formats from one paragraph to other

paragraphs in the same box or text chain. To copy applied paragraph formats,

select the paragraph or range of paragraphs that you want to change, then

press Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Alt+Shift (Windows) while clicking anywhere

in the paragraph with the formats you want to copy. Copying paragraph

formats in this way will not change any character attributes.

To use rules in text, see “Creating Rules Above and Below Paragraphs” in

Chapter 10, “Graphics in Typography.”

SPECIFYING ALIGNMENT AND INDENTATIONS P

QuarkXPress lets you specify how paragraphs are spaced horizontally in a column or

text box using alignment and indentation controls. Alignment and indentations are

both measured from the Text Inset speciﬁed in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box

(Item menu). The Text Inset value affects the four sides of a text box; it does not

affect the inner columns of a text box.

ALIGNMENTS

QuarkXPress includes five paragraph alignments: Left, Centered, Right,

Justified, and Forced.

•Left: Aligns selected paragraphs with the left indentation, or ﬂush left.

•Centered: Aligns selected paragraphs between left and right indentations.

•Right: Aligns selected paragraphs with the right indentation, or ﬂush right.

•Justiﬁed: Aligns selected paragraphs with both the left and right indentations.

Space is added or removed between characters or words to extend from the left

indentation to the right indentation, except for the last line.

•Forced: Aligns all lines between the left and right indentations, like the Justiﬁed

option, but includes the last line.

SPECIFYING ALIGNMENT

You can specify the alignment of selected paragraphs using any of the

following options:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Alignment and choose an alignment from the submenu.

Alternately, choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on

Windows). Choose an option from the Alignment pop-up menu. Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

199

Applying Paragraph Attributes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 199

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

Click an alignment icon in the Measurements palette or press the appropriate

keyboard command.

MAC OS WINDOWS

ALIGNMENT ICON COMMAND COMMAND

Left {C+Shift+L Ctrl+Shift+L

Centered }C+Shift+C Ctrl+Shift+C

Right [C+Shift+R Ctrl+Shift+R

Justiﬁed* $C+Shift+J Ctrl+Shift+J

Forced* ]C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+J Shift+J

*Not available in HTML text boxes.

åTo specify that a single word alone on a line in a justiﬁed paragraph should

extend from the left indentation to the right indentation, check Single Word

Justify (Edit &H&Js &Edit) for the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation

that is applied to that paragraph. Single Word Justify does not apply when

the single word on the line is the last line of a paragraph. (This option is not

available in HTML text boxes.)

The last line of a justified paragraph is justified only when text falls within

the paragraph’s Flush Zone (Edit &H&Js &Edit). To justify all lines in a para-

graph, no matter how short the last line, choose Forced (Style &Formats).

SPECIFYING INDENTATIONS

You can indent paragraphs from the left and right edges of a box or column, and

specify a unique indentation for the ﬁrst line of a paragraph. To specify indents

for selected paragraphs:

1Choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on Windows).

A ruler displays above the column containing the ﬁrst selected paragraph. The

ruler contains triangular icons for specifying paragraph indentations. Drag the

icons to change the indentations: left K, ﬁrst line k, and right J. When a para-

graph in a rotated or skewed text box is selected, the ruler only displays within

the dialog box.

Choosing Style &Formats displays a ruler above the column containing the first

selected paragraph.

Chapter 9: Typography

200

Specifying Alignment and Indentations

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 200

To specify indents, enter values in the Left Indent, First Line, and Right Indent ﬁelds in the

Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style &Formats).

2To specify how far a paragraph is indented from the left edge of a box or

column, enter a value in the Left Indent field.

3To specify how far the ﬁrst line of a paragraph is indented from the Left Indent

value, enter a value in the First Line ﬁeld.

First Line indentation is relative to the Left Indent applied to a paragraph. For

example, if you specify a Left Indent of .5", and a First Line indentation of .5",

the ﬁrst line will begin 1" from the left edge of the text box.

4To specify how far a paragraph is indented from the right edge of a box or

column, enter a value in the Right Indent field. Click OK.

åTo create a hanging indentation, specify a positive Left Indent and a negative

First Line indentation or drag the indentation icons on the column ruler. Use

the Apply button in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box

(Style &Formats) to experiment with the hanging indentation.

In addition to setting hanging indents as a paragraph attribute, you can enter a

special character that forces the indenting of all lines of text from that point to

the next paragraph return. Press C+\ (Mac OS) or Ctrl+\ (Windows) to enter

a special Indent Here character. (The Indent Here character is an invisible

character; to view invisible characters, choose View &Show Invisibles

(C+I on Mac OS, Ctrl+I on Windows.)

Chapter 9: Typography

201

Specifying Alignment and Indentations

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 201

SPECIFYING LEADING AND PARAGRAPH SPACING

QuarkXPress gives you precise control over the space between lines in paragraphs and

the space between paragraphs. Leading is a measure of line spacing — the distance

between text baselines in paragraphs. When you specify a leading value, it is applied

to all lines in selected paragraphs. Space Before and Space After controls let you

specify the amount of space before and after selected paragraphs. Leading and space

before or after can both be speciﬁed in style sheets.

METHODS FOR SPECIFYING LEADING

QuarkXPress lets you specify leading by three methods: absolute leading,

incremental auto leading, and percentage-based auto leading. Default auto

leading may be either incremental or percentage-based.

ABSOLUTE LEADING

Absolute leading sets the distance between baselines of text to a speciﬁc

value, regardless of the size of characters on the lines. For example, if you

specify an absolute leading value of 16 points for a paragraph, all baselines

will be spaced 16 points apart. When specifying absolute leading, use a value

that is the total vertical distance you want between text baselines.

INCREMENTAL AUTO LEADING

Incremental auto leading combines a base amount of auto leading with an

absolute value speciﬁed in the Leading ﬁeld (Style menu). Incremental leading

values must be preceded by a plus (+) or minus (–) sign.

DEFAULT AUTO LEADING

Entering the word “auto” or a “0” in the Leading ﬁeld (Style menu) tells

QuarkXPress to use the value in the Auto Leading ﬁeld of the Preferences

dialog box (Edit & Preferences & Preferences & Paragraph pane) to decide

whether percentage-based or incremental auto leading occurs. The default —

percentage-based — takes the base amount of auto leading and adds to it a

fixed percentage of the largest font size on the upper line to determine the

total amount of leading between an auto-leaded line and the line above it.

The default value for percentage-based auto leading is 20%.

Chapter 9: Typography

202

Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 202

∫If fonts or font sizes are mixed and matched, an auto-leaded paragraph may

have a different amount of space between each line. Auto leading starts with a

base amount of leading, which QuarkXPress determines by looking at the user-

speciﬁed font size, then calculating the ascent and descent values of the fonts

in each line of text. (Ascent and descent values are built into the fonts by the

font designer.)

åThe Paragraph pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &

Preferences) contains radio buttons that let you set leading in Typesetting

mode or Word Processing mode. In Typesetting mode, leading is measured

from baseline to baseline. In Word Processing mode, leading is measured from

the ascent of a line to the ascent of the next line. Typesetting mode is the

default (and is the preferred method of measuring leading). Word Processing

mode is included to provide compatibility with the leading methods of some

word processing programs.

SPECIFYING LEADING

You can specify the leading of selected paragraphs using any of the

following options:

STYLE MENU

Choose Style &Leading (C+Shift+E on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+E on Windows).

Enter an absolute leading value, an incremental leading value (preceded by a

plus or minus sign), or “auto” in the Leading ﬁeld. Click OK.

MEASUREMENTS PALETTE

Select the leading field, enter an absolute leading value, an incremental

leading value (preceded by a plus or minus sign), or the word “auto” in the

leading field. Or, click the leading icons n to increase or decrease leading in

1–point increments.

Specify leading for selected paragraphs in the leading ﬁeld of the Measurements palette.

Chapter 9: Typography

203

Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 203

çKEYBOARD COMMANDS

Press the appropriate keyboard command.

MAC OS WINDOWS

LEADING CHANGE COMMAND COMMAND

Decrease 1 point C+Shift+: Ctrl+Shift+:

Decrease .1 point C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+Shift+:

Shift+:

Increase 1 point C+Shift+”Ctrl+Alt+Shift+”

Increase .1 point C+Option+ Ctrl+Alt+

Shift+”Shift+”

∫When you use the leading icons or keyboard commands to adjust auto-leaded

paragraphs, QuarkXPress ﬁrst converts the auto leading value to the closest

absolute value (based on the largest font size in the paragraph). QuarkXPress

then adds or subtracts the amount you specify by using the leading icons or

keyboard commands. For example, a paragraph of 10-point text with 20%

auto leading applied is converted to 12 points of absolute leading. Then,

pressing C+Shift+: (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+: (Windows) reduces the absolute

leading to 11 points.

åThe default measurement unit for leading is points; however, you can specify

leading values using any of the measurement systems that QuarkXPress

supports. The value entered is always converted to points for display.

SPECIFYING SPACE BEFORE AND AFTER PARAGRAPHS

QuarkXPress lets you specify an absolute amount of space to place before and

after a paragraph. The alternative, adding space by entering paragraph returns,

can result in inconsistent line spacing.

To specify the amount of space between selected paragraphs, choose Style &

Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on Windows). Enter values in the

Space Before or Space After ﬁelds. The sum of the values in the Space Before

and Space After ﬁelds determines the total space between the selected para-

graphs. Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

204

Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 204

∫The Space Before feature does not place space before the ﬁrst paragraph in a

column or text box. To control the space at the top of a column or text box, use

the controls in the First Baseline area of the Text tab in the Modify dialog box

(Item menu).

åThe typesetting term set solid refers to lines of text that have no additional space

between lines. For example, 10-point type with 10-point leading is set solid.

When you apply a leading value of +0, lines of text are set solid no matter what

fonts or font sizes they contain.

SETTING TABS P

Tabs let you position text consistently. Use tabs when you want to create columnar

data, or to move text more than a single word space. QuarkXPress has six kinds of tab

stops: Left

Center

, Right

, Decimal

, Comma

, and Align On

. Tabs are

paragraph attributes, and can be speciﬁed in style sheets. If you do not set custom tabs,

QuarkXPress sets default left-aligned tabs every half-inch.

SETTING TAB STOPS

You can control how text aligns on a tab stop. Most tabs used in text have left

alignment, but you may want to use centered or right alignment in tables.

When creating tables or columns, aligning text on characters is useful for keep-

ing text and numbers aligned properly. You can align tabs on a decimal point,

comma, or any character. To set tabs for selected paragraph(s):

1Choose Style &Tabs (C+Shift+T on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+T on Windows).

A ruler displays above the column containing the ﬁrst selected paragraph. The

ruler is useful for previewing and modifying tabs in the selected paragraphs.

Because of document or screen size restrictions, both ends of the tab ruler may

not be visible. To view either end of the ruler, drag a tab stop indicator to the

left or the right end; the ruler and page will scroll to display the hidden portion.

When a paragraph in a rotated or skewed text box is selected, the ruler only

displays within the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.

åTo view tab characters on-screen, choose View &Show Invisibles. Tabs are

displayed as .arrows.

Chapter 9: Typography

205

Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:45 AM Page 205

Specify tabs using the icons and ﬁelds in the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box

(Style &Formats).

A ruler displays above the column containing the ﬁrst selected paragraph. The example shows,

from left to right, an Align On tab stop (aligned on the slash), a Left tab stop, a Right tab stop,

and a Decimal tab stop.

2Click a tab icon to specify the tab alignment, then drag it into position on the

tab ruler.

•Left 1 aligns text ﬂush left on the tab stop.

•Center 3 aligns text centrally on that tab stop.

•Right 2 aligns text ﬂush right on the tab stop.

•Decimal 5 aligns text on a decimal point (period).

•Comma p aligns text on a ﬁrst comma.

•Align On saligns text on any character you specify. When you select this tab,

the Align On ﬁeld displays. Select the existing entry, and enter the character

to align on.

Chapter 9: Typography

206

Setting Tabs

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 206

You can also click the tab icon, enter a value in the Position ﬁeld, and click Set.

When you click Set, it deselects the current tab selection in the ruler.

3To insert ﬁll characters (characters that alternate to ﬁll the space between text

and tab stops, as in a table of contents), enter up to two characters or spaces in

the Fill Character ﬁeld. Click OK.

∫If you choose Decimal or Comma alignment, the tab will align on one of those

characters, or on the ﬁrst nonnumeric character following a numeral. This lets

you correctly align columns containing numbers in parentheses.

åYou can create a series of tabs that are a consistent distance apart from each

other —incremental tabs —by using mathematical operators in the Position

ﬁeld. Place the ﬁrst tab, click Set, then add the distance to it in the Position

ﬁeld. For example, if you have a tab at p9, you can create another tab 9 picas

away by selecting the tab at p9 and clicking Set. Then enter “+p9” after the “p9”

in the Position field . Click Set again. You can add (+), subtract (-),

multiply (*), and divide (/) values in any QuarkXPress fields.

If you repeatedly use the same set of speciﬁcations to align tabular material in a

document, you may want to create a style sheet with the appropriate character

attributes, paragraph attributes, tab settings, and rules. This will save you the

work of reconstructing similarly formatted material.

MODIFYING AND DELETING TABS

As your text and design change, you may need to modify and delete tabs.

To modify tabs in selected paragraphs:

1Choose Style &Tabs (C+Shift+T on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+T on Windows).

2Click a tab icon (1, 2, 3, 5, p, or s) on the ruler to select it. Information about the

tab displays in the ﬁelds.

•To modify a tab’s alignment, click another tab icon in the dialog box. If you

click Align On, enter a character in the Align On ﬁeld.

•To modify a tab’s position, drag it on the ruler or enter a new value in the

Position field.

•To modify a tab’s fill character, select the Fill Character field and enter up

to two new characters.

•To delete a tab, drag it off the ruler.

•To delete all tabs, click Clear All, or press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows)

while clicking on the tab ruler.

3Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

207

Setting Tabs

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 207

∫When you delete tabs, existing tabs in the document revert to the default

spacing of .5" apart.

åPress Option+Tab (Mac OS) or Shift+Tab (Windows) to create a right-indent tab,

which lets you align characters ﬂush with the right indentation. A right-indent

tab overrides all other tabs for the paragraph. This tab is useful, for example,

when you want to place an end of story icon.

The Normal print paragraph style sheet is automatically applied when you

start typing in a new text box. By default, tab spaces are .5" apart. You can edit

the Normal style sheet for a specific document, or you can edit it when no

documents are open so the changes apply to all new documents.

CONTROLLING WIDOW AND ORPHAN LINES P

QuarkXPress lets you control two kinds of typographically undesirable lines known as

widows and orphans. Traditionally, a widow is deﬁned as the last line of a paragraph

that falls at the top of a column. An orphan is the ﬁrst line of a paragraph that falls

at the bottom of a column.

Using the Keep Lines Together feature, you can choose not to break paragraphs, so

that if all the lines in a paragraph do not ﬁt in a column or on a page, the whole para-

graph will ﬂow to the top of the next column or page. Alternately, you can specify the

number of lines that must be left at the bottom of a column or box, and at the top of

the following column or box, when a paragraph is broken. Using the Keep with Next ¶

feature, you can keep a paragraph together with the paragraph that follows it. This lets

you keep a subhead together with the paragraph that follows it, or keep other lines of

text that logically go together from being separated.

KEEP WITH NEXT ¶

The Keep with Next ¶feature forces a one-line paragraph to ﬂow with the

paragraph that follows it. If the paragraph is longer than one line, the last line

will ﬂow with the next paragraph (unless you also specify Keep Lines Together

for the paragraph). This prevents a subhead from remaining at the bottom of a

column when its associated paragraph ﬂows to the top of the next column. To

specify Keep with Next ¶:

1Select the paragraph that you want to stay with the next paragraph.

2Choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on Windows).

3Check Keep with Next ¶.Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

208

Setting Tabs

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 208

∫You can select multiple paragraphs and specify Keep with Next ¶,if they are all

one line paragraphs, or used with Keep Lines Together. However, if you try to

keep more paragraphs together than will ﬁt in a column, you will end up with

text overﬂow.

KEEPING LINES TOGETHER

The Keep Lines Together feature speciﬁes whether lines in paragraphs ﬂow

together or are separated when they reach the bottoms of columns. This can

prevent the ﬁrst line of a paragraph from remaining at the bottom of a column

or the last line from ﬂowing to the top of a column. To specify Keep Lines

Together for selected paragraphs:

1Choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on Windows).

2Check Keep Lines Together, and click one of the following options:

•Click All Lines in ¶to keep all the lines of a paragraph in the same column

or box, rather than breaking at the bottom. The paragraph is treated as an

indivisible unit.

•Click Start and enter a value in the Start ﬁeld to specify the number of lines

to keep together at the bottom of a column or box when a paragraph must be

broken. Enter a value in the End ﬁeld to specify the number of lines to keep

together at the top of a column or box when a paragraph must be broken.

The default value of “2” for both the Start and End ﬁelds prevents single lines

from occurring at either the bottom or top of a column, thus avoiding widows

and orphans.

3Click OK.

åGenerally, you will specify Keep with Next ¶for your headline and subhead

style sheets. If you have two-line headlines and subheads, you may want to spec-

ify Keep Lines Together, with All Lines in ¶checked. Then, you will probably

specify Keep Lines Together (usually with Start and End parameters) for your

body text style sheets.

If you apply either the Keep Lines Together or Keep with Next ¶option to

paragraphs and the column that contains the paragraphs is obstructed by an

item that divides the column or text box into two parts, QuarkXPress will ﬂow

the lines of text around the obstruction to maintain the Keep Lines Together

and Keep with Next ¶speciﬁcations.

A single paragraph that is too large to ﬁt in a single column or box will result

in text overﬂow, and the Text Overﬂow icon tdisplays at the bottom of the

text box.

Chapter 9: Typography

209

Controlling Widow and Orphan Lines

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 209

CONTROLLING HYPHENATION AND JUSTIFICATION P

QuarkXPress lets you group hyphenation rules and justiﬁcation settings as a single

speciﬁcation that you can apply to paragraphs. You can create a number of hyphen-

ation and justification specifications for a single document. Because hyphenation

and justification specifications are a paragraph attribute, you can apply different

sets of hyphenation rules and justification settings to paragraphs with different

needs. You can edit a hyphenation and justification specification after it has been

applied to paragraphs. When you edit a hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation,

paragraphs to which it is applied are reﬂowed according to the modiﬁed hyphenation

rules and justiﬁcation settings.

QuarkXPress also lets you control hyphenation by creating lists of hyphenation excep-

tions. Using the Hyphenation Exceptions feature, you can prevent certain words from

being hyphenated or require that they only be hyphenated between certain syllables.

CREATING HYPHENATION AND JUSTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS

QuarkXPress provides a default hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation

called Standard. Standard is the default hyphenation and justification

specification specified for the Normal paragraph style sheet and for all

newly created paragraph style sheets. To create additional hyphenation

and justification specifications:

1Choose Edit &H&Js (C+Option+H on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F11 on Windows).

Create new hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations in the H&Js dialog box (Edit menu).

Chapter 9: Typography

210

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 210

2Click New.

Set hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations in the Edit Hyphenation & Justiﬁcation

dialog box.

3Enter a descriptive name for the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation in

the Name ﬁeld. For example, you might name it “body copy.”

4Check Auto Hyphenation to have QuarkXPress automatically hyphenate

paragraphs to the specifications set in this area:

•Smallest Word: Enter a value from 3 to 20 to specify the minimum number of

characters a word must contain to be hyphenated.

•Minimum Before: Enter a value from 1 to 6 to specify the smallest number of

characters that must precede an automatic hyphen.

•Minimum After: Enter a value from 2 to 8 to specify the smallest number of

characters that must follow an automatic hyphen.

•Break Capitalized Words: Check this to enable hyphenation for words that

start with an uppercase character (for example, proper nouns and the ﬁrst words

of sentences).

5Enter a value in the Hyphens in a Row ﬁeld to specify the maximum number of

consecutive lines that can end in manually or automatically hyphenated words.

If you do not want to limit the number of consecutive lines that end with a

hyphen, choose Unlimited from the pop-up menu.

6Enter a value in the Hyphenation Zone ﬁeld to specify the area within which

hyphenation (automatic or manual) can occur. The Hyphenation Zone is meas-

ured from the right indentation to the end of a line of text. Hyphenation Zone

values apply only to nonjustiﬁed paragraphs.

•When you specify a Hyphenation Zone greater than 0", QuarkXPress hyphen-

ates a word only when: (1) the previous word ends before the Hyphenation

Zone and (2) an acceptable hyphenation point falls within the Hyphenation

Zone. Hyphenation Zone values apply only to nonjustiﬁed text.

Chapter 9: Typography

211

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 211

•A Hyphenation Zone value of 0" means that there is no Hyphenation Zone. In

this case, QuarkXPress either hyphenates a word according to the other hyphen-

ation criteria or wraps it to the next line if it will not ﬁt completely on the line.

7Enter values in the Justiﬁcation Method area to specify how words and char-

acters are spaced. The values in the Min. (Mac OS) or Minimum (Windows)

and Max. (Mac OS) or Maximum (Windows) ﬁelds apply to paragraphs with

Justified or Forced alignment (Style &Alignment). The values in the Opt.

(Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) ﬁelds apply to all paragraphs, regardless

of their alignment.

The Justiﬁcation Method area allows you to specify the justiﬁcation method.

•Min. Space (Mac OS) or Minimum Space (Windows): Enter a value in this ﬁeld

to specify the minimum amount of space between words in justiﬁed paragraphs.

•Opt. Space (Mac OS) or Optimum Space (Windows): Enter a value in this

field to specify the optimum amount of space between words in justiﬁed and

nonjustiﬁed paragraphs.

•Max. Space (Mac OS) or Maximum Space (Windows): Enter a value in

this field to specify the maximum amount of space between words in

justified paragraphs.

•Min. Char (Mac OS) or Minimum Char (Windows): Enter a value in this

field to specify the minimum amount of space between characters in

justified paragraphs.

•Opt. Char (Mac OS) or Optimum Char (Windows): Enter a value in this ﬁeld

to specify the optimum amount of space between characters in justiﬁed and

nonjustiﬁed paragraphs.

•Max. Char (Mac OS) or Maximum Char (Windows): Enter a value in this

field to specify the maximum amount of space between characters in

justified paragraphs.

Chapter 9: Typography

212

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 212

The values in the Minimum, Optimum, and Maximum Space ﬁelds in the

Justiﬁcation Method area are expressed as a percentage of the normal space

width in a font. The width of spaces in justiﬁed text will vary according to

these values.

The values in the Minimum, Optimum, and Maximum Character ﬁelds are

expressed as a percentage of the width of an en space that can be added or

removed between characters. The intercharacter spacing of characters other

than spaces within justiﬁed text will be adjusted to these values.

8Enter a value in the Flush Zone ﬁeld to specify the area within which the last

word in the last line of a justiﬁed paragraph must fall in order to be justiﬁed.

If you enter 1", the last line of a paragraph to which the hyphenation and

justification specification is applied must extend to within 1" of the right

indentation to be justified.

9Check Single Word Justify to specify that a single word on a line in a justiﬁed

paragraph should extend from the left indentation to the right indentation. If

Single Word Justify is unchecked, a single word on a line will be left-aligned.

10 Click OK; then click Save in the H&Js dialog box.

∫When you ﬁnd a word that does not hyphenate the way you prefer, you can add

it to your list of hyphenation exceptions (Utilities &Hyphenation Exceptions).

åQuarkXPress lets you adjust word and character spacing in a number of ways.

Hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, local kerning and tracking, kerning

tables, and customized tracking tables can combine to affect overall word and

character spacing.

In addition to hyphenating text automatically, you can control line breaks

and text ﬂow by inserting manual, or discretionary hyphens (C+- [hyphen] on

Mac OS, Ctrl+- [hyphen] on Windows). Discretionary hyphens are inserted

only when words are broken at the ends of lines.

As is true with words in general, the Hyphens in a Row and Hyphenation Zone

values speciﬁed for a paragraph’s hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation

also affect the way QuarkXPress hyphenates words in which you have entered

discretionary hyphens. If hyphenating a word at a discretionary hyphenation

point would violate one of these rules, the word will not be hyphenated.

Use Forced alignment (Style &Alignment) to justify the last line of a para-

graph even if it does not fall within the Flush Zone speciﬁed for the paragraph’s

hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation. The last line must have a paragraph

return after it for this to work. Forced alignment also overrides the Single Word

Justify setting.

Chapter 9: Typography

213

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 213

APPLYING HYPHENATION AND JUSTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS

Each paragraph in QuarkXPress has a hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁca-

tion associated with it, because each print paragraph style sheet speciﬁes

a hyphenation and justification specification. Usually you will specify a

hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation that is appropriate to the infor-

mation in the paragraph — for example, the hyphenation and justiﬁcation

speciﬁcation applied to body text may hyphenate text automatically, while

the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation applied to headlines may

prevent hyphenation.

To change the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation applied to selected

paragraphs, choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on

Windows). Choose an option from the H&J pop-up menu and click OK.

EDITING, DUPLICATING, AND DELETING HYPHENATION AND

JUSTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS

The H&Js dialog box (Edit menu) lets you edit, duplicate, and delete a docu-

ment’s hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations. Select a hyphenation and

justiﬁcation speciﬁcation in the list and click one of these buttons:

•Edit opens the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation so you can modify it.

•Duplicate creates a copy of the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation that

you can rename and modify.

•Delete removes the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation from the list

and lets you choose a replacement speciﬁcation for all instances of the

deleted speciﬁcation.

After you modify the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations used in a

document, the text will reﬂow accordingly.

åIf you create or edit hyphenation and justification specifications with no

documents open, the changes affect all new documents. If you create or

edit hyphenation and justification specifications with a document open,

the changes affect the active document. If you make the same changes to

the Standard hyphenation and justification specification often, you may

want to edit it with no documents open.

To compare two existing hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, choose

Edit &H&Js. Shift-click to select two consecutive items or C+click (Mac OS) or

Ctrl+click (Windows) to select two nonconsecutive items. Press Option (Mac OS)

or Ctrl (Windows) to change the Append button to Compare. Click Compare

to display a summary of each component; the differences display in bold.

You can also compare two hyphenation and justification specifications in

the Description field of the File &Append dialog box.

Chapter 9: Typography

214

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 214

APPENDING HYPHENATION AND JUSTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS

Using the Append feature, you can import hyphenation and justification

specification settings from other documents rather than recreating them.

1Choose Edit &H&Js (C+Option+H on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F11 on Windows).

2Click Append.

3Locate and select the document to append hyphenation and justification

specifications from; click Open.

4The Available column lists all the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations

in the source document. Select the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations

you want to import into the active document and double-click them, or click

the arrow icon ‡to move them to the Include column, or click Include All.

To select one hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation, click it. To select con-

secutive hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, press Shift while you click

the ﬁrst and last items in the range. To select nonconsecutive hyphenation and

justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click

each one.

Select hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations in the Available column to append to the

active document.

5Click OK; then click Save to close the dialog box.

∫If a hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation from the source document has

the same name as a hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation in the target

document, but is deﬁned differently, the Append Conﬂict dialog box displays.

See the next section for information about resolving these types of conﬂicts.

Chapter 9: Typography

215

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 215

RESOLVING HYPHENATION AND JUSTIFICATION

SPECIFICATION CONFLICTS

The Append Conﬂict dialog box provides options for handling imported

hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations that have the same name, but dif-

ferent speciﬁcations, as existing hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations.

The Existing and New lists display descriptions of the hyphenation and justiﬁ-

cation speciﬁcations to help you make decisions on handling the conﬂict.

Use the buttons in the Append Conﬂict dialog box to resolve name conﬂicts when appending

hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations.

•Rename: Click Rename to display a dialog box that lets you rename the

hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation. Enter a new name and click OK.

•Auto-Rename: Click Auto-Rename to have QuarkXPress place an asterisk in

front of the appended speciﬁcation’s name.

•Use New: Click Use New to have the appended hyphenation and justiﬁcation

speciﬁcation overwrite the existing speciﬁcation.

•Use Existing: Click Use Existing to prevent the appended speciﬁcation from

replacing the existing speciﬁcation; the existing hyphenation and justiﬁcation

speciﬁcation remains unchanged in the document.

If you want all hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations with conﬂicting

names to be handled the same way, check Repeat For All Conflicts. For

example, if you want to rename all conﬂicting hyphenation and justiﬁcation

speciﬁcations, check Repeat for All Conﬂicts, then click Rename. This check

box applies to the current document only.

Chapter 9: Typography

216

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 216

åIf you want to import style sheets, colors, dashes and stripes styles, and lists

along with hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, choose File &Append.

The Append dialog box lets you selectively import items such as style sheets and

colors from another document.

The Description list in the Append H&Js dialog box lists all the attributes

applied to the selected hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation, so you can

determine which speciﬁcation to append.

SPECIFYING HYPHENATION EXCEPTIONS

If you prefer certain words hyphenate in certain ways, you can specify that

hyphenation in a list of “hyphenation exceptions.”You can even specify that

certain words do not hyphenate at all. To create a list of hyphenation exceptions

for the active document:

1Choose Utilities &Hyphenation Exceptions.

Create a list of hyphenation exceptions by entering words and hyphens in the Hyphenation

Exceptions dialog box (Utilities menu).

2Enter a word in the ﬁeld with hyphens to represent the preferred hyphenation.

You cannot enter spaces or other punctuation.

For example, enter “mul-ti-me-dia” to allow hyphenation between any of those

syllables, enter “multi-media” to allow hyphenation between “multi” and

“media,” and enter “multimedia” to prevent automatic hyphenation.

3Click Add.

4Enter any variations of the word, with hyphens, that you want to hyphenate

the same way. For example, enter “pro-cess” and “pro-cesses” to specify that the

singular and plural forms hyphenate the same way.

5When you are ﬁnished adding words and variations of words, click Save.

Chapter 9: Typography

217

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 217

∫For information about how hyphenation exceptions are stored in the “XPress

Preferences” file, see “Saving QuarkXPress Preferences” in Chapter 1,

“Customizing QuarkXPress.”

åYou can prevent a word from being hyphenated by entering a discretionary

hyphen (C+- [hyphen] on Mac OS, Ctrl+- [hyphen] on Windows) immediately

before it or by entering the word in your Hyphenation Exceptions list (Utilities

menu). To prevent the hyphenation of a compound word, add a discretionary

hyphen immediately before the words. The compound word will then only

break at the hyphen.

To display suggested syllable breaks for a word, place the Text Insertion bar I

within or to the right of the word and choose Utilities &Suggested Hyphen-

ation. The Suggested Hyphenation dialog box displays the hyphenated

word based on the hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcation applied to the

paragraph, your list of hyphenation exceptions, the QuarkXPress hyphenation

dictionary, and the QuarkXPress hyphenation algorithm.

To specify that a compound word can only be hyphenated at the hyphen, you

can add both words to the list of hyphenation exceptions without hyphens. For

example, if you want to prevent “context-sensitive” from breaking in the middle

of the word “context” rather than after the hyphen, add both “context” and

“sensitive” to your hyphenation exceptions with no hyphens.

WORKING WITH STYLE SHEETS P

A style sheet is a group of paragraph attributes, character attributes, or both that

can be applied to selected paragraphs and characters in one step. Use style sheets to

change unformatted text into headlines, subheadings, captions, body copy, etc.

Using style sheets to apply a number of character and paragraph attributes at one

time reduces layout time and helps maintain typographic consistency.

CREATING PARAGRAPH STYLE SHEETS

A paragraph style sheet controls all paragraph attributes and character attributes

of the selected paragraph. Paragraph style sheets get their character attributes

from their associated character style sheet. To create a new paragraph style sheet:

1Choose Edit &Style Sheets (Shift+F11). The Style Sheet list displays the style

sheets currently deﬁned for the document (or the default list of style sheets if

no documents are open).

Chapter 9: Typography

218

Controlling Hyphenation and Justiﬁcation

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 218

Create a new paragraph style sheet in the Style Sheets dialog box.

When you create a new style sheet with no documents open, that style sheet

becomes part of the default style sheet list and is included in all subsequently

created documents. When you create a style sheet with a document open, that

style sheet is included only in the active document’s style sheet list.

The Show pop-up menu lets you display the type of style sheets shown in the

list. You can choose All Style Sheets, Paragraph Style Sheets, Character Style

Sheets, Style Sheets in Use, and Style Sheets not Used.

2Click the New button and choose Paragraph.

•Name: Enter a name in this ﬁeld, or QuarkXPress will use a default “New Style

Sheet” name.

•Keyboard Equivalent: To deﬁne a keyboard command for the style sheet, enter

one in the Keyboard Equivalent ﬁeld. You can enter any combination of C,

Option, Shift, or Control (Mac OS), or Ctrl or Ctrl+Alt (Windows), along with a

function or keypad key.

If you deﬁne a keyboard equivalent for a style sheet with a key sequence that

also deﬁnes a QuarkXPress command, the style sheet command will override

the QuarkXPress command when the Content tool Eis selected and a text

box is active.

•Based on: To base the attributes of a new style sheet on an existing one, click

the Based on pop-up menu and choose a style sheet from the list.

Chapter 9: Typography

219

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 219

•Next Style: To select a transition from one paragraph style sheet to another after

typing a carriage return, choose a paragraph style sheet from the Next Style

pop-up menu. The default setting keeps the same style sheet applied.

Applying a paragraph style sheet with a Next Style deﬁned does not apply the

Next Style to subsequent paragraphs that are already typed. The Next Style

applies only to text typed after pressing Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows).

•Style: To associate a character style sheet with the paragraph style sheet, choose

an option from the Style pop-up menu in the Character Attributes area. To

create a character style sheet, see “Creating Print Character Style Sheets” later

in this chapter.

∫If you use the Based on pop-up menu in the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog

box to base a style sheet on an existing one, changes you make to the original

style sheet are automatically applied to those based on it.

3Choose any of the next three tabs: Formats, Tabs, or Rules to specify those

attributes or properties for your paragraph style sheet.

Specify a paragraph style sheet’s attributes in the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box.

Chapter 9: Typography

220

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 220

•Formats: Click the Formats tab to specify the style sheet’s paragraph formats.

For speciﬁc information about the controls in this dialog box, see “Applying

Paragraph Attributes” in this chapter.

•Tabs: Click Tabs to specify the style sheet’s tab stops. For speciﬁc information

about the controls in this dialog box, see “Setting Tabs” in this chapter.

•Rules: Click Rules to specify lines that flow with text. To anchor a rule,

see “Creating Rules Above and Below Paragraphs” in Chapter 10, “Graphics

in Typography.”

4Click OK to return to the Style Sheets dialog box; then click Save to save the

style sheet for the document. After you save a paragraph style sheet, it is listed

in the Paragraph Style Sheet submenu (Style menu) and also in the Style

Sheets palette.

åTo create a new paragraph style sheet based on formatted text, ﬁrst select or

place the Text Insertion bar Iwithin a paragraph that contains the format

attributes that you want in your paragraph style sheet. Choose Edit &Style

Sheets to display the Style Sheets dialog box. Choose New &Paragraph and

enter a name in the Name ﬁeld. Click Save. Then apply the new style sheet to

the paragraph.

CREATING CHARACTER STYLE SHEETS

Each paragraph style sheet contains a character style sheet, which deﬁnes the

default character attributes (font, type style, etc.) for the paragraph style sheet.

Character style sheets can also be created independently of paragraph style

sheets to apply local formatting to text. For example, on this page the numbers

are formatted to be bold, purple, and use the font Helvetica 75, while the rest of

the text is another style. The three-step process of applying all the attributes to

the numbers is condensed to one step with a character style sheet. To create a

new character style sheet:

1Choose Edit &Style Sheets (Shift+F11). The Style Sheets list displays the style

sheets currently deﬁned for the document (or the default list of style sheets if

no documents are open).

2Click the New button and choose Character. The Edit Character Style Sheet

dialog box displays the character attributes at the position of the text insertion

point i, or the attributes of the first character of selected text. If no text is

selected, it displays the attributes of the default character style sheet.

•Name: Enter a name in this ﬁeld, or QuarkXPress will use the default “New

Style Sheet” name.

Chapter 9: Typography

221

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 221

•Keyboard Equivalent: To deﬁne a keyboard command for the style sheet, enter

one in the Keyboard Equivalent ﬁeld. You can enter any combination of C,

Option, Shift, or Control (Mac OS), or Ctrl or Ctrl+Alt (Windows), along with a

function or keypad key.

•Based On: To base the attributes of a new style sheet on an existing one, click

the Based On pop-up menu and choose a style sheet from the list.

•Character Attributes: Choose character attributes from the lower section of the

Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box. For information about character

attributes, see “Applying Character Attributes” earlier in this chapter.

The Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box (Edit &Style Sheets) allows you to create print

character style sheets.

3Click OK to return to the Style Sheets dialog box; then click Save to save the

character style sheet for the document. After you save a character style sheet,

it is listed in the Character Style Sheet submenu (Style menu) and also in the

Style Sheets palette.

Chapter 9: Typography

222

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 222

åYou can open the Style Sheets dialog box by pressing C(Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift

(Windows) while you click a style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.

If you press Control (Mac OS) while you click a style sheet name, or right-click

or Ctrl+click (Windows) a style sheet name, the context menu displays. If

you choose Edit, Duplicate, or New, the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet or Edit

Character Style Sheet dialog box displays for the selected style sheet. If you

choose Delete, an alert dialog box will display if that style sheet is applied

in the document. Choose a replacement style sheet from the dialog box’s

pop-up menu.

When you copy and paste text from one QuarkXPress document (the source) to

another (the target), any paragraph or character style sheets associated with the

text are added to the target document. If the style sheet names match existing

names in the target document, the text will maintain the source document’s

attributes, and a plus sign (+) may display next to the style sheet name in

the Style Sheets palette.

If you select multiple paragraphs that have multiple character and paragraph

style sheets applied, the Style Sheets palette will display those style sheet’s

paragraph and character icons in gray.

ASSOCIATING CHARACTER STYLE SHEETS WITH PARAGRAPH

STYLE SHEETS

To specify the default character attributes for the paragraph, you associate a

character style sheet with a paragraph style sheet. To do so:

1Choose Edit &Style Sheets (Shift+F11) and choose an option from the Show

pop-up menu.

2Select a paragraph style sheet in the Style Sheets list and click Edit.

3Select a character style sheet from the Style pop-up menu to associate with the

paragraph style sheet.

4Click OK, and then click Save in the Style Sheets dialog box. All text will be

updated and may reﬂow for paragraph style sheets with the newly associated

character style sheet.

APPLYING PARAGRAPH STYLE SHEETS

You can apply paragraph style sheets to any selected paragraphs. A selected para-

graph is a paragraph that contains the text insertion point ior selected text. You

can apply a paragraph style sheet three ways:

•Style Sheet submenu: Choose Style &Paragraph Style Sheet. Select a

style sheet from the submenu. The paragraph style sheet will be applied to

the paragraph.

Chapter 9: Typography

223

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 223

•Style Sheets palette: Choose View &Show Style Sheets (F11). Click the

paragraph style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.

•Keyboard command: Enter the keyboard command displayed next to the style

sheet name in the Style Sheets palette. Keyboard equivalents are assigned in

the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box (Edit &Style Sheets &[select

style sheet] &Edit button).

The Style Sheets palette allows you to apply paragraph (upper) and character (lower)

style sheets.

åWhen local paragraph or character attributes exist in selected text, a plus sign

displays next to the style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette. To remove local

attributes, select No Style and reselect the style sheet, or press Option (Mac OS)

or Alt (Windows) while clicking the style sheet name.

APPLYING CHARACTER STYLE SHEETS

You can apply a character style sheet to any selected text or at the text insertion

point i. You can apply a character style sheet three ways:

•Style Sheet submenu: Choose Style &Character Style Sheet. Select a char-

acter style sheet from the submenu. The character style sheet will be applied

to the text.

•Style Sheets palette: Choose View &Show Style Sheets (F11). Click the

character style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.

•Keyboard command: Enter the keyboard command displayed next to the style

sheet name in the Style Sheets palette. Keyboard equivalents are assigned in

the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box.

åWhen you apply a style sheet to a paragraph that has No Style applied to it,

local paragraph and character attributes are replaced by those speciﬁed in

the style sheet you apply.

If you want to remove local formatting as you apply a new style sheet, press

Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) as you click the style sheet name in the

Style Sheets palette.

Chapter 9: Typography

224

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 224

EDITING, DUPLICATING, AND DELETING STYLE SHEETS

The Style Sheets dialog box (Edit menu) lets you edit, duplicate, and delete a

document’s paragraph and character style sheets. Select a paragraph or character

style sheet in the list and click one of these buttons:

•Edit opens the style sheet so you can modify it.

•Duplicate creates a copy of the style sheet that you can rename and modify.

•Delete removes the style sheet from the list and lets you choose a replace-

ment style sheet for all instances of the deleted style sheet, if it is used in

the current document.

After you modify the style sheets used in a document, the text will

update accordingly.

åTo delete unused style sheets in your document, you can choose Edit &Style

Sheets and choose All Unused Style Sheets from the Show pop-up menu. Then

you can select the style sheets in the list and click Delete.

To compare two existing style sheets, choose Edit &Style Sheets. Shift-click to

select two consecutive items or C+click (Mac OS) or Ctrl+click (Windows) to

select two nonconsecutive items. Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to

change the Append button to Compare. Click Compare to display a summary

of each component; the differences display in bold. You can also compare two

style sheets in the Description ﬁeld of the File &Append dialog box.

APPENDING STYLE SHEETS

Using the Append feature, you can import paragraph and character style sheets

from other documents rather than recreating them.

1Choose Edit &Style Sheets (Shift+F11).

2Click Append.

3Locate and select the document with the style sheets you want to append

(the source document), then click Open.

4The Available column of the Append Style Sheets dialog box lists all the char-

acter and paragraph style sheets from the source document. Select the style

sheets you want to import into the active document and double-click them, or

click the arrow button ‡to move them to the Including column. Or, click

Include All. The Description lists display all attributes associated with selected

style sheets.

Chapter 9: Typography

225

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 225

To select one style sheet, click it. To select consecutive style sheets, press Shift

while you click press Shift while you click the ﬁrst and last items in the range.

To select nonconsecutive style sheets, press C(Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows)

while you click each one.

In the Available column, select paragraph and character style sheets to append to the active

document. Press C (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) to select nonconsecutive style sheets.

5Click OK. An alert warns you that appended style sheets and lists will include all

embedded style sheets, hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations, colors, and

dashes and stripes, and ask you want to append. Click OK, then click Save to

close the Style Sheets dialog box.

∫If a style sheet from the source document has the same name as a style sheet

in the target document, but is deﬁned differently, the Append Conﬂict dialog

box displays. See the next section for information about resolving style sheet

name conﬂicts.

If you append a style sheet with keyboard equivalent that is already used by

a style sheet in the active document, the appended style sheet will not have

a keyboard equivalent. You can assign a new one using the Edit Style Sheet

dialog box. (Edit &Style Sheets &[select style sheet] &Edit button)

åYou can also access the Append dialog box from the File menu (File &Append).

Chapter 9: Typography

226

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 226

RESOLVING STYLE SHEET CONFLICTS

The Append Conﬂict dialog box provides options for handling imported style

sheets that have the same name, but different speciﬁcations, as existing style

sheets. The Existing and New lists display descriptions of the style sheets to

help you make decisions on how to handle the conﬂict.

Use the buttons in the Append Conﬂict dialog box to resolve name conﬂicts when appending

style sheets.

•Rename: Click Rename to display a dialog box that lets you rename the style

sheet. Enter a new name for the style sheet and click OK.

•Auto-Rename: Click Auto-Rename to have QuarkXPress place an asterisk in

front of the appended style sheet’s name.

•Use New: Click Use New to have the appended style sheet overwrite the exist-

ing style sheet.

•Use Existing: Click Use Existing to prevent the appended style sheet from

replacing the existing style sheet; the existing style sheet remains unchanged

in the document.

If you want all style sheets with conﬂicting names to be handled the same way,

check Repeat For All Conﬂicts. For example, if you want to rename all conﬂict-

ing style sheets, check Repeat for All Conﬂicts, then click Rename. This check

box applies to the current document only.

åYou can deﬁne style sheets in ASCII text using XPress Tag codes. When you

import an ASCII text file with a style sheet defined by XPress Tag codes,

QuarkXPress imports the style sheets, including the attributes and formats

specified by XPress Tag codes, to the document. For information about

XPress Tags, see “XPress Tags” in the “Appendices.”

Chapter 9: Typography

227

Working with Style Sheets

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 227

POSITIONING TEXT IN TEXT BOXES P

A text baseline is the invisible line on which most characters sit. In QuarkXPress, you

can lock text baselines to an invisible, underlying horizontal grid (shown with View

Show Baseline Grid). Locking paragraphs to the baseline grid lets you align baselines

from column to column and from box to box, across a page and across spreads. You can

also align text vertically within text boxes, specify the space between vertically justiﬁed

paragraphs, and choose the distance that the characters are inset from the inside edge

of a text box.

SPECIFYING THE BASELINE GRID

To deﬁne a document’s underlying baseline grid:

1Choose Edit &Preferences &Preferences; then click Paragraph in the list on

the left (C+Option+Y on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Y on Windows).

2Enter a value between 0" and 13.889" in the Start ﬁeld of the Baseline Grid area

to specify how far down from the top of the page you want to place the ﬁrst line

of the grid.

3Enter a value in the Increment ﬁeld to specify the vertical distance between

the grid lines.

4Click OK.

LOCKING PARAGRAPHS TO THE BASELINE GRID

To lock selected paragraphs to the grid you deﬁned in the Preferences dialog

box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences &Paragraph pane):

1Choose Style &Formats (C+Shift+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F on Windows).

2Check Lock to Baseline Grid.

•Lines in paragraphs that are locked to the baseline grid are spaced in multiples of

the grid’s Increment value in the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &

Preferences &Paragraph pane).

•To lock paragraphs to the grid without disrupting the line spacing in your doc-

ument, specify a grid Increment value equal to (or a multiple of) the leading of

the paragraphs you plan to lock to the grid. For example, if your body copy is

set on 12 points of leading, enter an Increment value of 12 pt.

3Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

228

Positioning Text in Text Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 228

∫If a paragraph’s leading is greater than the baseline grid Increment value

speciﬁed in the Preferences dialog box (Edit &Preferences &Preferences &

Paragraph pane), each line of text will lock to the next available grid incre-

ment. For example, on a 12-point grid, lines in paragraphs with 13 points

of leading will lock to every other grid line, resulting in 24 points of space

between baselines.

WORKING WITH THE FIRST BASELINE

You can specify where the ﬁrst baseline of text is positioned, in relation to the

top inside edge of the text box, by using controls in the Text tab of the Modify

dialog box (Item &Modify).

The First Baseline area lets you specify the minimum distance between the text

inset at the top edge of a text box and the ﬁrst text baseline. The Minimum

pop-up menu provides three options for specifying this distance. You can specify

that the ﬁrst line be positioned based on the tallest character’s cap height, on

the tallest character’s cap height plus the vertical space needed for an accent

mark, or on the tallest character’s ascent.

When positioning the ﬁrst line of text in a box, QuarkXPress uses whichever is

larger — the Offset distance (as measured from the top inside edge of a text

box) or the Minimum pop-up menu setting you choose (as measured from

the box’s text inset).

SPECIFYING THE FIRST BASELINE FOR TEXT BOXES

To specify the ﬁrst baseline position for an active text box:

1Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows); then click

the Text tab.

Specify the First Baseline in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item &Modify).

Chapter 9: Typography

229

Positioning Text in Text Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 229

2To specify the distance between the ﬁrst text baseline in the box and the top

inside edge of the box, enter a value in the Offset ﬁeld.

3To specify the minimum distance between the ﬁrst text baseline in an active text

box and the text inset at the top edge of a text box, choose an option from the

Minimum pop-up menu.

•Cap Height is equal to the height of a zero (0) in the font of the largest charac-

ter on the ﬁrst line of text.

•Cap + Accent is equal to the height of a zero (0) in the font of the largest

character on the first line of text plus the extra vertical space needed for an

accent mark over an uppercase character in that font.

•Ascent is equal to the height of the ascenders (as speciﬁed by the font designer)

in the font of the largest character on the ﬁrst line of text.

4To preview your changes before making them permanent, press the Apply

button; then click OK.

∫When you choose Centered as the Vertical Alignment option, lines of text are

centered between the First Baseline position and the bottom of the text box.

When you choose Bottom, the top baseline cannot be closer to the top of the

box than the First Baseline position you specify. When you choose Justiﬁed,

the ﬁrst line of text is positioned at the First Baseline, the last line is positioned

at the bottom of the box, and the remaining lines are justiﬁed between them.

ALIGNING TEXT VERTICALLY

QuarkXPress gives you four options for positioning lines of text vertically within

text boxes: Top, Centered, Bottom, and Justiﬁed. To align text vertically in

an active text box with one of these four options:

1Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows); then click the

Text tab.

Specify vertical alignment for text in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box.

Chapter 9: Typography

230

Positioning Text in Text Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 230

2To specify the alignment you want, choose one of the four alignment options

from the Type pop-up menu in the Vertical Alignment area: Top, Centered,

Bottom, or Justiﬁed.

•Top: In top-aligned text boxes, lines of text are positioned in the box with the

top of the ﬁrst line positioned as speciﬁed in the First Baseline area. The box is

ﬁlled from top to bottom as text is entered.

•Centered: In center-aligned text boxes, lines of text are centered between the

First Baseline’sascent and the bottom of the text box. The box is ﬁlled from

the center as text is entered.

•Bottom: In bottom-aligned text boxes, lines of text are positioned with the last

line ﬂush with the bottom of the box. The box is ﬁlled from bottom to top as

text is entered.

•Justiﬁed: In justiﬁed text boxes, lines of text are positioned in the box with the

ﬁrst line positioned as speciﬁed in the First Baseline area, the last line ﬂush with

text inset at the bottom of the box, and the remaining lines justiﬁed between.

When vertically justifying text, you can specify the maximum vertical distance

that QuarkXPress will place between paragraphs.

3Click OK.

∫The Centered, Bottom, and Justiﬁed alignment options are only intended for

rectangular text areas, and can be disrupted by obstructing items.

SPECIFYING INTER ¶ MAX VALUE

The Inter ¶ Max field lets you specify the amount of space QuarkXPress

can insert between vertically justified paragraphs. This field is available

only when Justified is selected in the Type pop-up menu. To specify this

for selected paragraphs:

1Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows); then

click the Text tab.

2Choose Justiﬁed from the Type pop-up menu.

3To specify the maximum amount of space QuarkXPress can insert between

vertically justiﬁed paragraphs, enter a value in the Inter ¶ Max ﬁeld.

•If vertically justiﬁed paragraphs are spaced as far apart as the Inter ¶ Max ﬁeld

allows and text still does not extend from the top of the box to the bottom,

QuarkXPress will override the leading values and insert an equal amount of

additional space between lines.

•QuarkXPress can insert additional space between paragraphs up to the

Inter ¶ Max value when vertically justifying text. If the Inter ¶ Max value is

not sufﬁcient to vertically justify the lines in a column of text, QuarkXPress

Chapter 9: Typography

231

Positioning Text in Text Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 231

distributes the remaining space evenly between the lines of text, including

the space between the last line of one paragraph and the first line of the

paragraph below it.

•If you enter 0 (zero) in the Inter ¶ Max ﬁeld, QuarkXPress distributes space

evenly between lines and paragraphs when vertically justifying lines of text.

4Click OK.

∫The Inter ¶ Max value is a measurement of the amount of space that can

be inserted between paragraphs to justify the box. If this space is not large

enough to justify, then (and only then) should you add space between all

lines (including between paragraphs).

SPECIFYING TEXT INSET

Text inset lets you specify the distance that characters are inset from the inside

edge of a text box. You can specify that text be inset the same distance from all

four sides of the active box, or you can specify a different inset for each side.

To specify the text inset for an active text box:

1Choose Item &Modify (C+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows); then click

the Text tab.

2To specify the same inset for all four sides, leave Multiple Insets unchecked

and then enter a number in the All Edges ﬁeld.

To specify a single text inset for all four sides of the active text box, leave Multiple Insets

unchecked in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box.

3To specify different insets for the four sides, check Multiple Insets and then

enter numbers in the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right ﬁelds.

4Click OK.

Chapter 9: Typography

232

Positioning Text in Text Boxes

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 232

PRINCIPLES OF WEB TYPOGRAPHY W

Web typography is just as challenging, if not more so, than print typography. Not

only do you have to choose appealing page layout, you have to consider font avail-

ability, download speeds, and monitor sizes. Should you create text boxes that only

use HTML-supported features? Should you use a standard QuarkXPress box and

convert it to a graphic?

Fortunately, QuarkXPress lets you create Web documents with text boxes that use

only HTML-supported features as well as text boxes that use standard QuarkXPress

typographic features, so you can combine them to meet your needs. This section dis-

cusses the principles of Web typography and how to balance HTML and raster text

boxes, which are text boxes that will be converted to graphics when you export your

Web document. (To create Web documents, see Chapter 3, “Document Basics,” or

Chapter 7, “Document Layout.”)

PRINT AND WEB DOCUMENT CONSIDERATIONS

When you’re designing for print, you have some advantages that you don’t

have on the Web. Since typefaces are displayed the way they were designed,

instead of being approximated at 72 dpi, you can rest assured that people are

seeing the fonts you intended them to see. You can take advantage of advanced

features such as kerning, tracking, and automatic hyphenation. Printed text is

easier to read than text on a screen, so articles can be longer. Pictures can have

an astonishing degree of detail and realism without taking a long time to

download. You can also lay out pages with absolute precision.

On the other hand, HTML has some advantages of its own. Text can be enlarged

or reduced to ﬁt the preferences of the reader, and windows can be made wider

or narrower to accommodate different-sized monitors. Dynamic elements such

as rollovers make Web pages more interactive, and hyperlinks make it easy for

readers to get additional information about a product or concept at the click of a

button. Because text is stored in electronic format, you can use search software

to ﬁnd key phrases quickly and easily. And where the print on a page is stuck

to that page, the content of a Web page can be displayed on a wide variety of

devices, from desktop to palmtop, and even on appliances and cellular phones.

CONTROLLING THE APPEARANCE OF WEB DOCUMENTS

Even with these advantages, when you’re creating Web documents, fonts

become an even greater concern. Not only are typefaces approximated at 72 dpi,

but if readers don’t have the fonts you used, they probably won’t be seeing the

page as you designed it. Since you are unable to control which fonts each reader

has, you have to ﬁnd a solution.

For instance, you can use whatever fonts you want and accept the fact that

they will probably be substituted, and that different viewers would see different

versions of your Web page. However, you likely want some degree of control

Chapter 9: Typography

233

Principles of Web Typography

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 233

over the appearance of your Web pages, especially if it is important to maintain

a corporate identity or a look that is familiar and reassuring to your audience.

So why not just turn all your text boxes into raster text boxes (pictures)? That

way, the fonts would no longer be an issue, and your page would look the same

to everyone.

Turning all your text boxes into raster text boxes would indeed maintain the

look of your page, but it would also dramatically increase the download time for

the viewer. If you already have a page with many pictures, the download time

will be increased even further. If viewers have to wait too long to download your

page, chances are that they’ll give up in frustration.

To maintain some control over the look of your page and an acceptable

download time, you’ll probably have to make some design compromises. One

approach would be to turn page headers and some navigational links (text

you click on to load a new page) into raster text boxes, and use a “standard”

font for the rest of the text. A standard font is one that most users have, such

as Times, Helvetica, Arial, or Courier. If you choose a nonstandard font, it is

more likely that your reader won’t have it, and your page will not display as

you envisioned it.

Maybe this solution doesn’t meet your needs —it might be more important to

you that your company name is in a certain font, or that certain paragraphs

of text use standard QuarkXPress typography. You might need to use text on a

path or in a Bézier box. The important thing is that you choose carefully which

items you turn into raster text boxes

FIXED AND VARIABLE PAGE WIDTHS

Of course, you need to know the page size you’ll be using before you start

adding any boxes at all. What page size to use depends on a number of factors.

Again, you generally have no control over the size of your audience’s monitors,

making it more difﬁcult to decide on a page size.

You can choose a ﬁxed page size, such as 800x600 pixels. The advantage is

that page elements are always in the same place. The disadvantage is that if

the viewer’s monitor or browser window is too small (or too large), viewers

will spend a lot of time scrolling or resizing the page, and design elements

may be cut off or hidden.

If you choose a variable width page size, you can create a page with HTML text

boxes that resize based on the width of the user’s browser window. This is useful

when you don’t know what size the viewer’s monitor or browser window will

be, but means that HTML text boxes will change size, which might be undesir-

able for your design.

Chapter 9: Typography

234

Principles of Web Typography

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 234

TESTING YOUR WEB DOCUMENTS

Once you choose which items you want to convert to raster text boxes, you

can export your page and test it in different browsers. If it’s possible, testing it

on different computers and at different download speeds will give you a good

idea of what most of your viewers are going to encounter. This is an excellent

opportunity to make adjustments to reach a happy medium. For instance, if

your page downloads too slowly using a 28K modem, but at a reasonable speed

using a 50K modem, maybe you can change a few raster text boxes to HTML

text boxes, or reduce the number of pictures in the page. Or if you realize that

some important text looks ﬁne on a computer with that font installed, but hor-

rible on a computer without that font, you can turn that HTML text box into a

raster text box. (For information about HTML text boxes and raster text boxes,

including limitations of HTML text boxes, see “HTML Text Boxes and Raster

Text Boxes” in this chapter.)

Since Web typography is largely a matter of judgment, these suggestions are not

meant to be rigid rules, but factors to take into consideration when designing

and creating your Web documents.

HTML TEXT BOXES AND RASTER TEXT BOXES W

HTML text boxes are the default text box type in a Web document. HTML text boxes

must be rectangular (or square). Any other shape of text box will automatically be

changed to a raster text box. (To create text boxes, see Chapter 4, “Box Basics.”)

Raster text boxes are HTML text boxes that will be converted to a picture when you

export your Web document as HTML. Raster text boxes allow you to use formatting

that is not supported by HTML, but they also increase the size of your page and the

page’s download time. To convert an HTML text box to a raster text box, choose

Item

Modify and check Convert to Graphic on Export. (To make the HTML

text box a variable width box, check Make Variable Width in the Text tab.)

You can format text in an HTML text box using the same controls and tech-

niques as for text boxes in a print document. (For information about those

controls and techniques, see the preceding Psections in this chapter).

However, the following features are not available in HTML text boxes:

•Forced or Justiﬁed alignment

•Hyphenation and justiﬁcation speciﬁcations (H&Js)

•Lock to Baseline Grid

•Tabs

•First Baseline and Inter-Paragraph Max settings

•Baseline Shift

•Kerning and tracking

Chapter 9: Typography

235

Principles of Web Typography

25530DO.qxd 11.13.01 11:46 AM Page 235

•Horizontal and Vertical Scale

•Outline, Shadow, Small Caps, Superior, and Word Underline type styles

•Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical

•Text Angle

If you want to use any of these settings in an HTML text box, choose Item &

Modify and check Convert to Graphic on Export to convert the HTML text

box to a raster box.

QUARKXPRESS FEATURES NOT SUPPORTED BY HTML

The Edit Style Sheets dialog box (Edit menu) will display an asterisk next to

any settings in that dialog box that are not available for an HTML text box;

however, this does not mean that only features marked with an asterisk are

not supported by HTML. There are other QuarkXPress features that are not

supported by HTML:

•HTML text boxes cannot be rotated. If you want to rotate a text box, select the

text box, choose Item &Modify and check Convert to Graphic on Export.